You are on page 1of 296

Oracle® Cloud

Administering Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud

Oracle Cloud Administering Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Authors: EPM Information Development Team
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and
disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or
allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit,
perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation
of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find
any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of
the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS:
Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or
documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure,
modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed
on the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs.
No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not
developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that may create a risk of
personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all
appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates
disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective
owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under
license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the
AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark
of The Open Group. Microsoft Windows, PowerPoint, Word, Excel, Access, Office, Outlook, Visual Studio, Visual Basic,
Internet Explorer, Active Directory, and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products, and services
from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any
kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement
between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred
due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement
between you and Oracle.

Contents

Documentation Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1. Creating an Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Workflow for Creating an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Creating an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Enabling Application Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Enabling Features During Application Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Enabling Features Using the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Chapter 2. Managing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Managing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Importing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating the Metadata Import File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Loading the Metadata Import File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Exporting Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Creating the Data Import File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Loading the Data Import File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Viewing Data Import and Export Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Refreshing the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removing an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Scheduling Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using the Inbox/Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Viewing User Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Chapter 3. Working with Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Dimensions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

iii

Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Intercompany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Multi-GAAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Working with Dimension Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Expanding and Collapsing Dimension Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Navigating Dimension Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Finding Dimensions or Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Sorting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Moving Members Within the Dimension Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Viewing a Member’s Ancestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Showing Member Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Adding Custom Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Aggregation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Data Storage Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setting Dimension Density and Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Setting the Evaluation Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Defining Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Account Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Summary of Account Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Aggregation (Consolidation Operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Time Balance Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Account Types and Variance Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Setting Account Calculations for Zeros and Missing Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Saved Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Data Types and Exchange Rate Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Defining Account Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Defining Entity Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Intercompany Property for Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Base Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Working with Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

iv

Dynamic Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Adding or Editing Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Deleting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Deleting Parent Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Viewing Member Properties from Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Working with Shared Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating Shared Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Setting Up Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Working with Multiple Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Number Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Viewing Currency Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Creating Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Editing Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Deleting Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting Up Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
About Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Creating Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Editing Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Deleting Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Copying Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Customizing Application Years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adding Years to the Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Editing Year Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Working with Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Understanding Attribute Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Deleting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Working with Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Creating Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Assigning Attribute Values to Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Modifying Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Deleting Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Working with User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Creating UDAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing UDAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Deleting UDAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Working with Member Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Viewing Details of Formula Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Working with Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

v

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Chapter 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Shared Members and Valid Intersection Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Managing Invalid Intersection Reports . . . . . . . 105 Creating Valid Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Suppressing Invalid Data in Forms . . . . . . 88 Deleting Alias Tables . 111 vi . . 88 Editing or Renaming Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Understanding Valid Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Anchor and Nonanchor Dimensions . . . . 88 Copying Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Viewing Valid Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Managing Valid Intersections . . . . 93 Chapter 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Clearing Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Substitution Variables and Valid Intersection Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Redundancy or Overlap in Valid Intersection Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .About Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Evaluation Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Valid Intersections . . . . . . . . . 107 Disabling and Enabling Valid Intersection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Chapter 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Jobs Overview . . . 96 Viewing Audit Details . . . . . . . . . . 106 Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Valid Intersection Rules . . . . . . . . 100 Valid Intersection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Editing Details for a Valid Intersection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Creating an Invalid Intersection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Deleting a Valid Intersection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Editing and Deleting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Auditing Information Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Duplicating Valid Intersection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Working with Valid Intersections in Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Valid Intersection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auditing Tasks and Data . . . . . . 91 Viewing Pending Jobs and Recent Activity . . Managing Jobs . . . . . 95 Configuring Audit Tasks . 87 Creating Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Setting Printing Options . . . . 136 Editing Forms . . . . . 112 Deleting an Invalid Intersection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Editing an Invalid Intersection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Running an Invalid Intersection Report . 118 Forms and Access Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Opening Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Previewing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Forms and Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Editing Simple Forms from within a Composite Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating Master Composite Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Forms and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Forms and Currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Renaming Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Predefined Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Page Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Working with Forms and Form Components . . 122 Setting Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Deleting Simple Forms from a Composite Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Creating Simple Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Setting Form Grid Properties . . . . . . . 129 Adding Simple Forms to a Composite Form Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Chapter 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Form Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Setting Composite Form Section Properties . 117 Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Creating Composite Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Form Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Embedding Charts in Composite Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Setting Composite Form Point of View and Page Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Setting Form Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Forms and Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Forms and Shared Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Setting Form Layout . . . . . . . 129 Setting Composite Form Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 vii . 130 Rearranging Forms in the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Duplicating an Invalid Intersection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Close Manager Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Deleting Journal Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Consolidation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Consolidation Dimension . . . . . 139 About Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Data Flow in the Consolidation Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Translating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Consolidation and Translation Rules . . . . . . . . . 139 Working with User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up the Close Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Chapter 10. . . 140 About User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Consolidating Data . . . . . . . . 154 Example 1: Reconsolidating Data from a Form . . . Managing Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Creating Journal Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Calculation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Creating User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Intercompany Eliminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Running Form Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Managing User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Chapter 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Adding or Changing Smart List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Viewing Consolidation Progress . 147 Consolidation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consolidating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Creating and Assigning Values to Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Displaying #MISSING with Smart Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Example 3: Consolidating Data for Multiple Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Deleting Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Managing Journal Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Chapter 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Working with Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 viii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Deleting User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Working with Smart Lists . . . . . 142 Adding or Changing Smart List Properties . 141 Synchronizing Smart Lists in Reporting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Example 2: Consolidating Data from the Data Status Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Consolidation and Translation Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Previewing Smart Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Sample Task Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Managing Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Deleting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Working With Task Type Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Viewing Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Assigning Task Type Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Viewing Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Importing Task Types . . . . . 169 Importing List Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Searching for Attributes . . . . . . . . . 160 Managing Close Process Organizational Units . . . 167 Managing Close Process Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Specifying Task Type Instructions . . . . . . . . 177 Searching for Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Managing Holiday Rules for Close Calendars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Setting Task Type Parameters . . 181 Specifying Task Type Questions . 178 Deleting Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Editing Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Deleting Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Duplicating Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Changing Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Close Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Task Types . . . . 188 Searching for Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Editing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Viewing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Editing Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Chapter 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Exporting Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Creating Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Creating Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Defining Attributes . . . . 160 Managing Global Integration Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Setting Task Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Viewing Task Type History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Managing Close Manager System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Viewing Template History . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Setting Template Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Setting Task Predecessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Adding Tasks to Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Specifying Template Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Manually Validating Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Setting Task Access . . 200 Importing Tasks into Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Viewing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Editing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Task Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Viewing Task History . . . 224 Importing and Exporting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Creating Schedules from Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Task Import File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Working with the Task Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 211 Creating Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Searching for Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Assigning Viewers . 215 Adding Task Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Deleting Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Reassigning Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Opening Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Chapter 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Specifying Task Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 191 Creating Task Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Exporting Tasks to Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Working With Task Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Editing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Applying Template Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Specifying Day Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Applying Task Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Working With Template Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Selecting the Workflow . . . . . . . . . 226 Sorting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Embedding Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Setting Task Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Setting Task Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Viewing Schedule History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Locking Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 xi . . . . . . . and Pasting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Deleting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Supplemental Data Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Chapter 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Close Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Aborting Tasks . . . . 233 Assigning Schedule Viewers . . 234 Adding Day Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Viewing Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Manually Creating Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Viewing Schedule History . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Validating Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Reopening Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Approving or Rejecting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . 235 Working With Schedule Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Importing Tasks into Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Adding Tasks to Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Opening Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Submitting Tasks . . . . . . . 230 Chapter 14. . . . . 227 Moving Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Updating Tasks in Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Supplemental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Adding Instructions to Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Reassigning Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Searching for Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Setting Schedule Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Applying Schedule Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying. . . 250 Supplemental Data Dashboard Views . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Setting Required Task Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Setting Schedule Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Authorizing System-Automated Tasks . . . 237 Editing Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Deleting Schedules . . . . . . . . 229 Managing Task Reassignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Searching for Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Available View Actions . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Working with Supplemental Data Manager Form Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Specifying Artifact Strings . 273 Chapter 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Deleting Data Set Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Viewing Data Set History . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Specifying a Default Alias Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Editing Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Setting Up Email for Approvals and Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Adding Data Set Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Modifying the Navigation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Specifying Refresh Database Options . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Specifying Form Template Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Importing List Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Adding Dimension Attributes . . . . . .Displaying Column Attributes in Supplemental Data Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Making Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Setting Form Template Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Deploying a Form Template to a Data Collection Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Creating Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Specifying Number Formatting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Creating Supplemental Data Manager Form Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Setting Member and Alias Display Options . . . . . . . . 272 Managing Data Collection Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Deleting Dimension Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Setting Approvals Options and Out-of-Office Settings . . 255 Working with Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Specifying Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Duplicating Form Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Un-Deploying a Form Template to a Data Collection Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Editing Dimension Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Deleting Form Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Customizing Your Application Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Viewing Form Template History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Managing Dimension Attributes in Supplemental Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 xii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Viewing User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Specifying Form Template Questions . . . 264 Assigning the Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Specifying the Date Time Display . . . . . 262 Deleting Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 xiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Setting Up the Approval Unit Hierarchy . 284 Chapter 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Setting Application Defaults . 293 Viewing Approval Unit Hierarchy Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Selecting Approval Unit Hierarchy Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Assigning Approval Unit Owners and Reviewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Specifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Locking and Unlocking Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Limiting Use of an Application During Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Assigning Approval Unit Hierarchies to Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Approval Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Deleting and Renaming Approval Unit Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Managing Periods for the Approval Process . . . 288 Starting the Approval Process . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Editing Approval Unit Hierarchies . . Managing the Approval Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Creating Approval Unit Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Selecting Notification Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiv .

visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http://www. For information.Documentation Accessibility For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility. Access to Oracle Support Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired. 15 .com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http:// www.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.oracle. visit http://www.oracle.oracle.

16 .

Documentation Feedback

Send feedback on this documentation to: epmdoc_ww@oracle.com
Follow EPM Information Development on these social media sites:
LinkedIn - http://www.linkedin.com/groups?gid=3127051&goback=.gmp_3127051
Twitter - http://twitter.com/hyperionepminfo
Facebook - http://www.facebook.com/pages/Hyperion-EPM-Info/102682103112642
Google+ - https://plus.google.com/106915048672979407731/#106915048672979407731/posts
YouTube - https://www.youtube.com/user/EvolvingBI

17

18

Creating an Oracle Financial
Consolidation and Close Cloud
Application

1
In This Chapter

Prerequisites................................................................................................19
Workflow for Creating an Application ....................................................................19
Creating an Application ...................................................................................20
Enabling Application Features ............................................................................21

An application is a set of related dimensions and dimension members that are used to meet a
set of consolidation and close process needs. Each application has its own accounts, entities,
scenarios, and other data elements.

Prerequisites
l

l

l

After analyzing available historical data, you have created a set of requirements and
developed an application design that supports your requirements.
Security components have been set up. See “Managing Users and Roles” in the Getting
Started with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud.
At least one user is granted the Service Administrator role of the service instance.

Workflow for Creating an Application
Table 1

Workflow to Create an Application

Task

Description

More Information

Create application structure

Create an application.

See “Creating an Application” on page
20.

Load metadata and refresh
the application

Load dimensions and their members into the application
from load files.

See “Importing Metadata” on page 27.

Load data

Load data from a flat file.

See “Importing Data” on page 32.

Set up forms folders and
forms

Create forms folders and forms and specify who can access
them. Users use forms to view or enter application data.

See Chapter 7, “Managing Forms”.

19

Task

Description

More Information

Set up task lists and tasks

Create task lists and tasks, and specify who can access
them.

See Chapter 13, “Managing Tasks”.

Create reports

Design and develop reports that display the data available
in the application.

See Building Reports in Designing with
Financial Reporting Studio for Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management
Cloud.

Creating an Application
Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud is a multi-dimensional consolidation
application. By default, the system provides a required set of pre-defined dimensions to store
the consolidation detail data. During application creation and configuration, you can select
additional optional dimensions based on your application needs.
To create an application, you must be the Service Administrator.

ä To create an application:
1

Log on to Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud as a Service Administrator.

2

From Financial Consolidation and Close, click Start.

3

On the Create Application: General page, enter a name for the application.

4

Enter an application description.

5

Click Next.

6

On the Details page, select the calendar and currency options for the application:
Note: After you create an application, you cannot change or enable these options.

l

Time Period - Number of Months: Select the number of months to include in the year:
12 months or 13 months.
If you selected 13 months, select the period Distribution. The default distribution is
3-3-3-4.

l

l

l

l

20

Start and end year: Select the period range to include in the application.
First month of fiscal year: From the drop-down, select the first month to use for the fiscal
year. For 12 months, the default is January. For 13 months, the default is P1.
Optional: Create HYTD Members: By default, the application provides the following views
of data: Periodic, YTD, QTD. To include Half Year to Date(HYTD) time periods, click
Enable.
Main Currency: From the drop-down, select the main currency for your application. The
default currency is USD.

l

7

Multicurrency: Select if your application contains data for more than one currency. If the
Multicurrency option is not enabled, the Currency dimension is not created for the
application.

Click Next to enable application features.
Note: See “Enabling Application Features” on page 21.

8

9

From the Review page, review the selected application details and select an option:
l

To create the application, click Create.

l

To change any settings, click Back and make changes in the previous screen.

From the Application Creation Status message, click OK.

Enabling Application Features
Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud provides a set of consolidation features that
includes out-of-the-box translations, consolidation, eliminations and adjustments.
When you create an application, the system creates these dimensions:
l

Year

l

Period

l

View

l

Currency

l

Consolidation

l

Scenario

l

Entity

l

Intercompany

l

Account

l

Movements

l

Data Source

Depending on the functionality required for your application, you can enable additional
features, dimensions, and members that you need. For example, you can enable journal
adjustments or tracking of intercompany eliminations.
Note: After a feature is enabled, you cannot disable it.

You can select these features.
Tip: To view the available options within each feature, click Show.

21

If the Multi-GAAP option is not enabled.Total Liabilities. then from the sub-options. you can configure your data collection workflow through Supplemental Data Manager Other Data—Select this option if you want to collect data from another source. Net Asset Approach—This option allows you to track your Net Assets separately within the Balance Sheet hierarchy as Net Assets = Total Assets . then the total elimination value from all data sources is stored as one total in the application rather than by the data source detail. You can rename members to reflect the correct GAAP adjustment if needed. The aggregation of these two parent members should be zero as Total Assets = Total Liabilities and Equity.l Track Multi-Source Data Input Select this option if you have multiple sources of data input and adjustments. If you select this option. l Balance Sheet Hierarchy You can select the Balance Sheet hierarchy that is most suitable for your application. This option tracks the local GAAP data input as well as any GAAP adjustments. the Intercompany Dimension is not displayed in your application. m m l Supplemental Data—Select this option if you want to collect additional supplemental data from Supplemental Data Manager. If enabled. select the other sources that you want to track. If the Multi-GAAP option is enabled. so you can add two custom dimensions for your application. Multi-GAAP Select this option if you need to report your financial statements in both local GAAP and in IFRS or other GAAP. you can have one additional custom dimension for your application. 22 . If journal adjustments are enabled. This option enables you to track your intercompany elimination data separately by data source. m m l Traditional Balance Sheet Approach—This option provides the account hierarchy with Total Assets as a parent member and Total Liabilities and Equity as a separate parent member. the Data Source dimension will also include the Journals Input member. a corresponding member is added to the Data Source dimension. the system creates an ICP dimension containing system members. If this option is not selected. An additional member named “Other Load” will be created in the Data Source dimension for tracking purposes. For each selection. The Entity dimension displays a property for members that specifies if the member should be included for ICP. If you do not enable intercompany transactions. a member with the same name is created in the ICP dimension. If the property is selected. When you enable this option. Intercompany Select this option if your application includes intercompany data. You can also include additional members and hierarchies for other GAAP adjustments. you can additionally select Track Intercompany Elimination. the system does not create the Multi-GAAP dimension.

then enter a name for the dimension. l Include Ratio Calculations Select the applicable ratio calculations that you want to include in your application. 23 . If enabled. If you select this option. you can additionally select Journal Workflow for the journal process. Journals Select this option if your application includes journal adjustment data. m m m m m Liquidity Ratio o Current Ratio o Quick Ratio o Cash Ratio Asset Management Ratio o Inventory Turnover o Asset Turnover o Days Sales in Receivables o Days Sales In Inventory Profitability Ratio o Gross Profit Margin o Return on Sales o Return on Equity Leverage Ratio o Debt To Equity Ratio o Debt Ratio Custom Dimensions Select this option to add Custom Dimensions. Individual ratio accounts and the corresponding calculations will be created as part of the application. Calculate Adjustment—Select this option to allow the system to calculate the adjustment amount based on the Local GAAP and IFRS amount entered. and there are no journal-related metadata or reports. A separate Ratio hierarchy will be created in the Account dimension with the specific ratio groups that you selected. In a journal workflow. the Journals menu does not display in the application. all journals must first be submitted for approval before they can be posted to the system.m m l Enter Adjustment—Select this option to enter GAAP adjustments manually. The system adds a Journal Input member to the Data Source dimension. You can add additional ratio calculations to each group. the Journals menu displays in the application. If you do not enable Journals.

the system adds Account and Entities to the Configure screen in the Console. 24 . o Custom Dimension 1 o Custom Dimension 2 Enabling Features During Application Creation During the application creation process. you can enable features at any time using the Console. See “Enabling Application Features” on page 21. . The Enable Features page displays the features available to be enabled. which cannot be disabled or changed. you can only add one custom dimension. When you create an application. If your application is enabled with the Multi-GAAP reporting option. you enable features using the Features tab in the Create Application Wizard. click OK. the system adds a configuration task for each Custom dimension to the Configure screen. ä To enable application features using the Console: 1 On the Home page. click Enable Features. 5 Click Enable. It also displays the features that you selected as part of application creation. Enabling Features Using the Console After you create an application. 4 Select to enable one or more features. If you add Custom dimensions when you enable features. 6 When the system displays a message that the functionality has been enabled. click Console.You can add a maximum of two custom dimensions to an application. click Configure 3 From the Configure screen. 2 On the left.

...................................................................................................................................................................39 Viewing User Statistics ................................................... To manage applications.......................... 25 .............................................................. see “Managing Dimensions” on page 26............................ you must be the Service Administrator.................................36 Viewing Data Import and Export Status ................27 Exporting Metadata ........................... To manage dimensions........................................................................31 Importing Data ........................... click Console............... such as the number of tasks..................................37 Removing an Application.25 Managing Dimensions ................................. ä To view the Application overview: 1 On the Home page......................................................... It also lists the dimensions used by the application.........................37 Refreshing the Database ............. forms............. The Application overview shows the application properties and application statistics..39 Using the Inbox/Outbox ...................................................... 2 On the left............ rules......... and approval hierarchies in your application.....................................39 Application Overview After you create an application...........Managing Applications 2 In This Chapter Application Overview...................... click Application 3 If it is not already displayed.......... click the Overview tab...................... .................... you can view and manage it using the Application console.............................................................26 Importing Metadata........................................38 Scheduling Maintenance ........................32 Exporting Data.............

Managing Dimensions Dimensions categorize data values. See “Adding Custom Dimensions” on page 50. 2 Click Application. Evaluation Order enables you to specify which data type prevails when a data intersection has conflicting data types. click Console. These dimensions are provided with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud: l Account l Period l Data Source l Consolidation l Currency l Entity l Intercompany l Movement l Scenario l Year l View You can create additional Custom dimensions. The Dimensions page lists dimensions in order of precedence. and then click the Dimensions tab. 3 Perform a task: 26 . ä To manage dimensions: 1 On the Home page. The order of dimensions is critical for the structure and performance of an application and determines how data calculations will perform.

the first line in the file: l l Lists the dimension and any member properties used by subsequent metadata records. tab-delimited. click the Up or Down arrow in the Order column next to the dimension that you want to move.csv (comma-delimited). A header record. Creating the Metadata Import File Before you begin loading. you must create an import file for each artifact that you want to import (dimensions. a list of metadata records that you want to import or update. click the name of the dimension that you want to rename. These artifacts are supported in imports: l Dimensions l Smart Lists l Exchange rates To import metadata. To reorder the dimensions. properties that are not included are inherited from the corresponding parent’s default property value Is case-sensitive 27 . click Export. l To export metadata.txt (tab-delimited or other delimiter characters).l l l l To view the details of a dimension. click the Evaluation Order field next to the dimension that you want to update. The file consists of these sections: 1. To set a different evaluation order. See “Creating the Metadata Import File” on page 27 Load the import file or files (you can import multiple dimension files at the same time). and then enter a new name in the Dimension field. Importing Metadata You can import metadata from a file in a comma-delimited. or other format. To rename a Custom dimension. click the name of the dimension that you want to view. The import file must contain a header record. The file format can be . See “Importing Metadata” on page 27. l To import metadata. click Import. or . perform these tasks: l l Create an import file for each artifact that you want to import. the header record and subsequent records do not need to include all properties. See “Exporting Metadata” on page 31. smart lists. and exchange rate tables). See “Loading the Metadata Import File” on page 30. and then below the header record.

After the header record. Parent. if data storage is not specified. Other delimiter characters can be used if they are supported and the same delimiter character is used throughout the file. Each metadata record contains a delimited list (comma. the import file loads an Entity dimension with the required header record and three data records.l l Can list properties in any order. the default property is assumed. and sets data storage to Never Share. The last data record (e1. a list of metadata records that you want to import update. Never Share. Entity) imports Entity member e1 as a child under the root member Entity. Example: Entity Dimension Import File In this example. Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud supports these delimiter characters in import and export files: l tilde (~) l grave accent (`) 28 . e2. For a list of supported delimiter characters and exceptions. Entity. Shared) imports a shared member of e1 under member e2.) imports Entity member e2 under the dimension root member because no parent is specified. e1. assuming that no other members exist: Entity e1 e2 e1 (Shared) The first data record (e1. the parent member (Parent) into which to import the member. 2. This example is comma-delimited. . Unspecified values assume the default. it assumes the default value. The next data record (e2. and sets the data storage to Shared. The header record specifies the member to be imported (Entity). e2. see “Example: Entity Dimension Import File” on page 28. see “Other Supported Delimiter Characters” on page 28. or other) of property values that matches the order designated in the header record. A metadata record can skip a property that is specified in the header record. For an example import file. Data Storage e1. as long as the subsequent metadata records are in the same order Can use comma or tab delimiters. tab. . in this case. Other Supported Delimiter Characters In addition to commas and tabs. Entity e2. Shared Using this import file would result in this outline. and the Data Storage property to assign to the member. For example.

one vertical bar ( | ) is supported. Import and Export Metadata Delimiter Exceptions Do not use these delimiter characters in metadata import and export files. Note the following exceptions.) Only one character is supported for use as a delimiter. Caution! Not all of the characters listed can be used for all import and export scenarios.l exclamation point (!) l number sign (#) l question mark (?) l dollar sign ($) l percent sign (%) l caret (^) l ampersand (&) l asterisk (*) l parentheses ( ) l hyphen-minus (-) l plus (+) l colon (:) l semicolon (. For example. Table 2 Import and Export Metadata Delimiter Exceptions Delimiter Character Reason for Exception double quotation mark (“”) Creates an empty file 29 .) l angle brackets (< >) l backslash (\) l forward slash (/) l vertical bar ( | ) l apostrophe (‘) l braces ({ }) l underscore (_) l brackets ([ ]) l at sign (@) l period (. but two vertical bars (| |) are not supported.

Enter the delimiter character that is used in the import file. See “Creating the Metadata Import File” on page 27. For File Type. 5 Select the location of the import file or files: l l 6 Inbox—Loads the import file or files from the server. 4 On the Import Metadata page. click Create. select an option: l Comma delimited l Tab delimited l 30 Local—Loads the import file or files from a location on your computer. smart lists. For Import File.Delimiter Character Reason for Exception plus (+) Causes an error if the metadata import file contains consolidation properties that use these characters minus (-) forward slash (/) percent sign (%) angle brackets (< >) Causes an error if the property uses the value <none> Note: Any character that conflicts with a character in a member name causes an error. see “Other Supported Delimiter Characters” on page 28. Enter the name of the file in Import File. . click Browse to select the import file on your computer for the artifact that you’re importing. 3 On the Application tab. Table 3 Import and Export Data Delimiter Exceptions Delimiter Character Reason for Exception parentheses ( ) Causes an error if used in a data import file double quotation mark (“”) Creates an empty file hyphen-minus (-) Causes an error if used in a data import file Loading the Metadata Import File ä To load the metadata import file: 1 Create an import file for each artifact (dimensions. For a list of supported delimiter characters and exceptions. and then click Import. and exchange rate tables) that you want to import. Other. 2 On the Home page. click Dimensions. click Console.

click Save as Job to save the import operation as a job. or it is a base member of a shared member that was specified. and all export files are consolidated into one zip file. ä To export metadata to a file: 1 On the Home page. import metadata. You can view the import status in the Jobs console. click Dimensions. 9 Optional: If the selected location is Local. click Validate to test whether the import file format is correct. Then. select Clear Members and execute the import process again. 2 On the Application tab.txt files from the zip file if you want to use the files as import files (for example. click Console. 4 Select the target location of the export file: 31 .txt (tab-delimited or other delimiter character) format. the Refresh Database dialog box prompts you to refresh the database. Oracle recommends loading the metadata file without selecting Clear Members to make sure that the file loads successfully. and then run rules when the data load is complete. which you can schedule to run immediately. depending on the file type).csv or .txt.csv (comma-delimited) or . click Create. Optional: If the selected location is Inbox.7 Select Clear Members to delete members not explicitly specified in the load file before performing the import. 10 Click Import to run the import operation. 3 On the Export Metadata page. Exporting Metadata You can export metadata to a file in a . the import process will only add or update existing members.csv or . To refresh. then import data. Saving an import operation as a job is useful to batch a load sequence. for example. or at a later time. These artifacts are supported in the export process: l Dimensions l Smart Lists l Exchange rates The system creates an export file for each artifact (. and then click Export. See “Viewing Pending Jobs and Recent Activity” on page 91. 11 If the import process is successful. when importing into another application). If Clear Members is not selected. Note the following guidelines: l l 8 Any member not specified is deleted from the outline after importing the dimension unless it is an ancestor of a member that was specified. You must extract the . click OK.

and then specify where to save the export file.csv (comma-delimited). see “Other Supported Delimiter Characters” on page 28.l Local—Saves the export file to a location on your local computer. Load the import file or files (you can import multiple dimension files at the same time). See “Loading the Data Import File” on page 35.csv file for each artifact. The file format can be . they are loaded in sequential order. 7 Optional: If the selected location is Outbox. l Outbox—Saves the export file to the server. 8 Click Export. smart lists.txt (tab-delimited or other delimiter characters). You can load data using a text file with sections that map the file data to dimensions. which you can schedule to run immediately. When you load multiple data files. For examples of Data Import files.txt file for each artifact. The import file must contain a header record. To import data. you must create an import file for each artifact that you want to import (dimensions. or at a later time. For a list of supported delimiter characters and exceptions. Enter the delimiter character that you want to use in the export file.txt file for each artifact. or . See “Creating the Data Import File” on page 32. a list of metadata records that you want to import or update. Note: You should not run reports. 32 . you must be a Service Administrator. l Other—Creates a . 5 Select the artifact or artifacts to export. books. l Tab delimited—Creates a tab-delimited . Creating the Data Import File Before you begin loading. To import data. 6 For File Type. and exchange rate tables).Periodic View” on page 33 and “Example: Data Import File .YTD View” on page 33. select an option: l Comma delimited—Creates a comma-delimited . perform these tasks: l l Create an import file for each artifact that you want to import. see “Example: Data Import File . Importing Data After you import dimensions. click Save as Job to save the export operation as a job. and then below the header record. or batches while data is being loaded. you can populate data by importing data files.

Consol Feb. England. Actual. After that. "FCCS_Entity Input. FCCS_No Intercompany. "FCCS_Entity Input. The first Column Header is the Dimension name of the import dimension. ENTITY CURRENCY. FCCS_Local GAAP". 150. FY14. FY14. FCCS_No Movement.either Consol or Rates. 100. ENTITY CURRENCY. FCCS_No Movement. Mar: 370 A data import file would have these rows. FCCS_No Movement. Periodic. FCCS_No Movement. ENTITY CURRENCY. FCCS_No Intercompany. FCCS_YTD Input. ENTITY CURRENCY.Periodic View You can import periodic data in a monthly frequency. The Last column is the cube name . 100. "FCCS_Entity Input. "FCCS_Entity Input. The first row is the required file Column Headers: Period. FCCS_Data Input. Actual. FY14.Data Import File Format The file format consists of rows and columns. Consol Feb. Consol Mar. FY14. Actual. The next set of columns is the data value for each of the driver members. "FCCS_Entity Input. FCCS_Local GAAP". FCCS_No Movement. Data Load Cube Name Jan. 370. The first row consists of Column Headers. England. Sales.. FCCS_Data Input. Example: Data Import File . FCCS_Data Input. FCCS_YTD Input. England. FCCS_Local GAAP". England. Consol Example: Data Import File . 33 . 120. FCCS_Local GAAP". Actual. FCCS_Local GAAP". FCCS_No Intercompany. Point-of-View... and the last Column Heading is Data Load Cube Name. Periodic. FCCS_Data Input. FCCS_Local GAAP". FCCS_Data Input. The first row is the required file Column Headers: Period. Consol Load Methods These options are available for loading a data file into an application. Sales. Actual. Data Load Cube Name Jan. there can be members from one other dimension called the driver dimension. FCCS_YTD Input. England. FCCS_No Intercompany. FCCS_No Movement.Jan: 100..Jan: 100. ENTITY CURRENCY. 250. The next Column Heading is the Point-of-View. FY14. FCCS_No Intercompany. Mar: 120 A data import file would have these rows. Consol Mar.YTD View You can import periodic data in a YTD view. Suppose the following data exists in the application for the Sales account: Sales. FY14. FCCS_No Intercompany. Actual. "FCCS_Entity Input. FCCS_Data Input. Feb: 250. ENTITY CURRENCY. Point-of-View. The Point-of-View column has members of the remaining dimension to uniquely identify the cell to which data is being imported. Feb: 150. Periodic. England. Each row contains the member of the Load dimension as the first column. Suppose the following data exists in the application for the Sales account: Sales.

("Actual". Jan. California. if any. 10. Each record in the data load file is imported into the cell. Jan. With Database Actual. ("Actual". Sales : 55. 15000.000 Replace. FY15. m Within File—The system accumulates the cell values that are within the file.000 A load file has the following data: Entity. Sales : 25. California.000 (Accumulate two records with existing value in database) 34 . 10000. FY15. Suppose the following data exists in the application: Actual. FY15. Load Method Examples The following examples show how the load options work. FY15.l l l Merge—Use this option to overwrite the data in the application with the data in the load file. Jan.000 Actual. Jan. California. COGS. None Actual. FY15. COGS : 5. California. before the first record for a specific Scenario/Year/Period/Entity is encountered.000 Actual. and Entity is cleared. Expenses : #MI (Replace clears everything in SYPE combination) Merge. Jan."Jan"). 25000. Jan. Replace—Use this option to replace data in the application. Expenses : 5. Jan. the entire combination of data for that Scenario. California. Jan. COGS : 5. Jan. FY15. FY15. COGS. Consol These examples how the data after the import using these option combinations: Merge. California. None Actual. Sales : 25. California."Jan"). FY15.000 (second record wins) Actual. California. Expenses: 5. California. Jan. FY15. Data Load Cube Name California. Point-of-View. Sales.000 Actual. California. Accumulation Type—Select one of these options to accumulate the data in the application with the data in the load file: m None—Each record in the data import file replaces the existing value in the database for the record.000 Actual. Consol California."FY15". 5000. In Replace mode. Period. FY15. m With Database—The data is added to the existing value of the cell. Sales: 20.000 (second record wins) Actual."FY15". Year. replacing the old value.

FY15. 3 Click Create. For File Type. FY15.000 Actual. Jan.000 Actual. FY15. California. see “Other Supported Delimiter Characters” on page 28. Jan.000 Actual. 4 Select the location of the data import file: 5 l Local—Imports the data import file from a location on your computer. California. FY15. California.Overwrite data in the application. click Console.000 Replace. Within File Actual. select an option: l Comma delimited l Tab delimited l 6 Other—Enter the delimiter character that is used in the import file.000 Replace. Jan.000 Actual. Jan. FY15. For a list of supported delimiter characters and exceptions. California. California. California. California. select a mode: l Merge . Expenses : 5. FY15. Jan. FY15. and then select Import Data. COGS : 30. Jan. 2 On the Application tab. Jan. Expenses : #MI Loading the Data Import File ä To import the data file: 1 On the Home page. Sales : 35. Each record of data is imported into the cell. FY15. Jan.000 Actual. From Import Mode. California. if any.000 Actual. COGS : 20. Jan. California. FY15. With Database Actual. California. FY15. l Inbox—Imports the data import file from the server. click Actions. Jan. Expenses : 5. Sales : 35. replacing the old data. Within File Actual.000 Actual. California. FY15.Actual. Jan. COGS : 20. Sales : 35. Expenses : #MI (Replace clears all the data before the import) Merge. COGS : 20. 35 .

click Actions. Period. Year.Add the data to the existing value of the cell. 11 Optional: If the selected location is Local. l With Database . Enter or select the source file: l If you selected Local. . which you can schedule to run immediately.csv file for each artifact. and Entity is cleared.l 7 8 9 Replace . and then click the link for the import to view the details. click Save as Job to save the import operation as a job. view Recent Activity. click Validate to test whether the import file format is correct. From Date Format. click Browse to navigate to the file. before the first record for a specific Scenario/Year/Period/Entity is encountered. select a format: l MM-DD-YYYY l DD-MM-YYYY l YYYY-MM-DD 10 Optional: If the selected location is Inbox. 4 On the Export Data page. 14 To view details about the import process. click Console.Replace data in the application. l If you selected Inbox. 13 From the information message that the data was submitted successfully. From Accumulation Type. Exporting Data ä To export data: 1 On the Home page. and then select Export Data. select an option: l Comma delimited—Creates a comma-delimited . select a type: l None . click OK. the entire combination of data for that Scenario. select the target location of the data export file: 5 36 l Local—Saves the data export file to a location on your local computer. 3 Click Create. or at a later time.Replace the existing value in the database for the record. l Within File . click Jobs. from the Console page. For File Type. In Replace mode. l Outbox—Saves the data export file to the server. enter the name of the file in Source File. 12 Click Import. l Tab delimited—Creates a tab-delimited .Accumulate the cell values that are within the file. 2 On the Application tab.txt file for each artifact.

when you modify properties of an Entity member. and other data specified in an application. Enter the delimiter character that you want to use in the export file. Before refreshing the database. 6 For Smart Lists. add a Scenario. which you can schedule to run immediately or at a later time. Databases are structured according to dimensions. For example. For a list of supported delimiter characters and exceptions. click Jobs 3 From Recent Activity. or change access permissions. click the name of the import or export job to view the details. which is used to store data in the application. select an option: l Errors l Warnings l Information l All .txt file for each artifact. To reduce the size of data export file. Refreshing the Database On the Application page. 4 From Show. you can choose whether to enable all users or just the current administrator to use the application in maintenance mode during the refresh process. attributes. Changes made to an application aren’t reflected to users performing data entry and approval tasks until you refresh the databases for the application. 7 Select the slice of data to be exported. see “Other Supported Delimiter Characters” on page 28. You can 37 . 9 Click Export. you can refresh the application database. these changes are stored in the relational database until you refresh the application database. click Save as Job to save the export operation as a job. ä To view the status of a data import and export: 1 On the Home page. hierarchical members. You must refresh the application database whenever you change the application structure. if a form has an entire row of #missing values. and then specify where to save the data export file. click Console. 8 Optional: If the selected location is Outbox. specify Export Labels or Export Names.l Other—Creates a . the row will be omitted from the data export file. 2 On the left. Viewing Data Import and Export Status The Import and Export Status page displays details of recent jobs.

ä To refresh the database: 1 On the Home page. click the name of the job in the Jobs console. Oracle recommends that you back up the application first. and then click Save. To edit your selections. Oracle recommends that you back up your outline file and export data from all databases. After the database refresh. . This action cannot be undone. 2 On the Application tab. and then click Refresh.also log off all users. click Console. review the confirmation message. Removing an Application Removing an application deletes it and all of its contents. 3 On the Refresh Database page. you can enable users to use the application. and you can terminate any active application requests. ä To remove an application: 1 38 On the Home page. Any scheduled jobs for the application will also be deleted. Caution! Before you refresh. To schedule a database refresh job. click Actions. click Save as Job. click Refresh Database. the refresh job options that you select are applicable each time the job is run. click Console. name the job. Log off all users—Logs off all users before starting the refresh Kill all active requests—Terminates any active requests in the application before starting the refresh After Refresh Database Enable use of the application for—Allows All users or Administrators to use the application after the refresh 5 Choose an option: l l To refresh the database now. and then select Refresh Database. 4 Make selections for before and after the database refresh: l Before Refresh Database m m m l Enable use of the application for—Allows All users or Administrators (or the current logged-in administrator) to access the application in maintenance mode during the refresh. and then click Save. click Create. Note: If you schedule a recurring refresh database job.

click Actions. and then select Remove Application. click Console. 4 Click Save. During the nightly maintenance window. 2 In the Upload File box. refresh the listing. 4 Optional: To refresh the list of files. click Refresh. Scheduling Maintenance By default. To continue. recycles the application. applies any patches. ä To upload a file: 1 Click Upload. 39 . 4 Click Upload File. click Console. and then select Inbox/Outbox Explorer. 3 Review the confirmation message. click Yes. and so on. ä To schedule maintenance: 1 On the Home page. If you prefer. 2 On the Application tab. Viewing User Statistics You can determine which Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud users are logged on to an application. and how long since they accessed it. and then select Schedule Maintenance. Using the Inbox/Outbox The Inbox/Outbox enables you to upload files to the server/inbox and download the files from the server to your local computer.2 On the Application tab. and upload files from the server. 3 Select the local time zone and the time of day for maintenance. click Browse to select a file. you can schedule daily maintenance to occur at another time. click Actions. You can filter by name. 3 Optional: Click Overwrite file. and then click Apply. the system performs backups. click Actions. ä To view files in the Inbox/Outbox: 1 On the Home page. click Filter. 3 Optional: To filter the list of files. Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud automatically performs daily maintenance starting at midnight local time. It also enables you to view the files that are in the Inbox/ Outbox and then use the files to schedule import and export jobs. enter a name. 2 On the Application tab.

ä To view user statistics: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Manage. .The View Statistics page displays the list of logged-in users alphabetically. 40 . To view user statistics. with the time since last access for the current application. you must be the Service Administrator. click View Statistics.

.. By default.............................................50 Defining Accounts...........................................84 Working with Member Formulas .............................................71 Setting Up Scenarios .......65 Setting Up Currencies ............55 Defining Entity Members ..........87 Dimensions Overview Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud provides a set of consolidation and close features that includes out-of-the-box translations.............64 Working with Members ................................................................................................................................ when you create an application...................... consolidation.......................80 Working with Attributes ...............................................................................................................41 Working with Dimension Hierarchies ...................................................................... Depending on the functionality required for the application................................................................................................................ the system enables only the dimensions that are needed for the features............80 Working with Attribute Values....... Each dimension is pre-seeded with a minimum set of dimension members to allow for flexible application configuration...............................................................................................................................................................................................................82 Working with User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) ...........47 Adding Custom Dimensions.......................... eliminations and adjustments....................Working with Dimensions 3 In This Chapter Dimensions Overview .............................. the system creates dimensions in this order: l Account l Period l Data Source l Consolidation l Currency l Entity l ICP 41 ....................................................................................................................................................86 Working with Alias Tables ..77 Customizing Application Years ...............

all periods default to the calendar months with period labels of January. that defines its accounting behavior. 42 . If you use 12 months. If you select 13-periods. and so on. The system provides these options for the Period dimension: l l 12-months. The default value is 12 months. You can create Half-Yearly periods. Account The Account dimension represents a hierarchy of natural accounts. Note: You cannot delete any parent-level Period members. all periods default to period labels P01. The system also creates Quarterly periods for both 12-month and 13-period options. and whether the account is an Intercompany Partner account. such as quarters and months. 12 periods of data are available for the year. Period The Period dimension represents time periods. with January as the beginning of the Fiscal Year. Any change to the dimension order should first be carefully evaluated. P02. The following sections describe the system-defined dimensions. if the Actual scenario maintains data on a monthly basis. March. and so on. In addition to these dimensions. Depending on the fiscal year information. Each account has a type. such as Revenue or Expense. Accounts store financial data for entities and scenarios in an application. you must then specify the first period of the Fiscal Year. Every application must include an Account dimension. 13-period. the system builds the Period hierarchy for the application. You define properties for Account dimension members. If you select 12-months. February. the number of decimal places to display. such as the Account type. It contains time periods and frequencies by displaying the time periods in a hierarchy. P03. Custom dimensions should be added after the ICP and before the Movement dimension.l Movement l Scenario l Year l View l Multi-GAAP The order of the dimensions has an impact on the performance of the consolidation. you can create custom dimensions. See “Defining Accounts” on page 55. For example. You can add child-level members.

You cannot remove any of the system-created members. including journal inputs. to the Entity Total.To specify periods for an application. When you create an application.Stores all child Entity related manual journals and rule-based adjustments and intracompany adjustments. the system creates the Consolidation dimension with the following hierarchy: l l l l l Entity Input .For a specified entity.The member that is used for all user input. see “Creating an Application” on page 20. It provides an audit trail of the transactions applied to data during the consolidation process. By default. 43 .The total of Entity Input and Entity Consolidation Proportion . this member represents input data and non-consolidation related business logic (for example. Entity Total . Entity Consolidation . For child-level entities. member formulas and allocations). Entity Adjustments .For a specified entity. To specify input members during application creation. this member stores the values obtained after applying the percentage contributed to its parent. It includes journals input to provide a better audit trail when entity data is consolidated in the consolidation path. the system creates these Data Source members: l Total Data Source l Total Input (optional) l Data Input l Journals Input l Intercompany Eliminations (optional) The optional members are created based on the options that you specify during application configuration. You can view the separate data input journals input in both the Proportion and Elimination members of the Consolidation dimension. For a Base entity. this member intersection is an invalid intersection. this member stores the sum of Contribution for all of its child entities. For the Parent entity. the total of the Contribution Total members of its children entities becomes the Entity Input of the Parent Entity. You can create additional members in the hierarchy as needed to track input. Consolidation The Consolidation dimensions enables you to report on the details used to perform the different stages of the consolidation process. see “Creating an Application” on page 20. Data Source The system stores the different types of input in the Data Source dimension.

Contribution . legal entities.l l l Elimination . The Entity dimension is the consolidation dimension of the system. Entities in an organization can be categorized as base. subsidiaries. or any organizational unit. departments. See “Defining Entity Members” on page 64. Every application must include a Currency dimension. You can define any number of entities. such as the management and legal reporting structures. The Currency dimension must include a currency for each default currency assigned to an entity in the Entity dimension.The consolidated result of a single Entity for a specific Parent Entity. All relationships among individual member components that exist in an organization are stored and maintained in this dimension.Stores all Parent/Child entity related manual journal adjustment data. the system provides the Currency dimension with predefined currencies to use in the application. Dependent entities are owned by other entities in the organization. If you enable this option 44 . such as the default currency. For each application. Entities can represent divisions.Stores the Intercompany elimination values. You can create members in the Currency dimension for each currency needed in your application. Hierarchies in the Entity dimension reflect various consolidated views of the data. Elimination data and Contribution Adjustments for the Parent/Child entity. Intercompany The Intercompany dimension represents all intercompany balances that exist for an account. When you create an application. business units. Note: You cannot add or remove any members from this dimension. This includes the Proportion data. regions. It is used to store the Entity members for Intercompany transactions. plants. See “Setting Up Currencies” on page 71. legal consolidation. You define properties for Entity dimension members. countries. Entity The Entity dimension stores the entity hierarchy and represents the organizational structure of the company. you specify a currency to use as the Application Currency. Base entities are at the bottom of the organization structure and do not own other entities. Contribution Adjustments . and specify whether the entity allows adjustments and stores intercompany detail. or consolidation by activity. dependent. or parent entities. Parent entities contain one or more dependents that report directly to them. Various hierarchies can correspond to geographic consolidation. Currency Currencies store translated values for entities.

During application creation. Intercompany Entities . Movement The Movement dimension captures the movement details of an account. A plug account is an account that. and FX to CTA calculations. the Movement dimension is created by default with pre-seeded members. the system does not create the Intercompany dimension. When you create intercompany transactions. the system creates an Intercompany dimension containing system members. a member with the same name is created in the Intercompany dimension. Note: If you do not enable Intercompany Data when you configure features for the application.This member is the top-most member in the hierarchy. Entity dimension members have a member property called Intercompany that specifies if the member should be included for intercompany transactions. specify the entities that perform intercompany transactions By default. By default. To set up an application for intercompany transactions. It enables administrators to perform these tasks: l l View details of the cash flow movements when viewing the Balance Sheet Automatically generate the Cash Flow due to the segregation of movements based on cash flow categories When you create an application. and optionally adds system members based on the features that you enable. stores the difference between two intercompany accounts.when you create an application. 45 . when eliminations are completed. each group must have at least one intercompany account and one plug account.This member is the parent member under which all ICP entities are created. the system creates these Intercompany members: l l l No Intercompany . It cannot be renamed or edited. If you select Yes for this property. See “Creating an Application” on page 20. You cannot modify or delete Intercompany members. You cannot add new members to the Intercompany dimension.This member is used in member intersections to store information such as currency rates. Total Intercompany . the system creates cash flow members and hierarchies for Cash Flow Reporting in the Movement and Account dimensions. you must perform these actions: l l When defining accounts. the system provides members in the Movement dimension to maintain various types of cash flow data. specify the accounts that perform intercompany transactions and specify a plug account for each intercompany account When defining entities.

46 . you cannot decrease the range. when you create an application. A Legal scenario can contain data calculated according to legal GAAP format and rules. By default. l HYTD .Half-Year-to-Date view. the cumulative values for the year or quarter are displayed. l QTD . If you set the View to Periodic. HYTD is only created it if you selected it during application creation.Each period shows the data entered. You can increase the range of years after the application is created. When you load data. or Forecast. For example. Budget. the Actual scenario can contain data that reflects current business operations. By default. However.Year-to-Date view.Quarter-to-Date view. Periods within a half-year are cumulative.Scenario The Scenario dimension represents a set of data such as Actual. The system provides a default range. See “Customizing Application Years” on page 80. calculated or derived for this specific period. l YTD . you can load data in YTD. If you set the View to Year-to-Date or Quarter-to-Date. You cannot remove any View dimension members or create new members. The system builds the Year dimension based on the range that you specified. which you can change. and the data is distributed accordingly in the Periodic values. View The View dimension represents various modes of calendar intelligence such as Periodic. such as Alias. the View dimension has these members: l Periodic . You can edit member properties. and create additional Scenario members. Periods within a quarter are cumulative. Yearto-Date. See “Setting Up Scenarios” on page 77. you specify the range of years for the application. The Budget scenario can contain data that reflects targeted business operations. the system creates the Actual system Scenario member. and Quarter-to-Date frequencies. Data is stored in the Periodic member. the values for each month are displayed. When you create an application. Year The Year dimension represents the fiscal or calendar year for data. You load data into the system at the base-level view. Periods within a year are cumulative. The Forecast scenario typically contains data that corresponds to predictions for upcoming periods. You can rename Actual if needed.

Upper-level dimension members are called parent members. click Dimensions. Relationships are represented graphically in a collapsible hierarchy diagram. Working with Dimension Hierarchies Subtopics l l l l l l l Expanding and Collapsing Dimension Hierarchies Navigating Dimension Hierarchies Finding Dimensions or Members Sorting Members Moving Members Within the Dimension Hierarchy Viewing a Member’s Ancestors Showing Member Usage Dimension hierarchies define structural and mathematical relationships. Expanding and Collapsing Dimension Hierarchies ä To expand dimensions or members: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. By default. The bottom-level hierarchy members are called base-level members. see “Creating an Application” on page 20. You can also include additional members and hierarchies for other GAAP adjustments. if you select this dimension. and consolidations between members in the database. Data is entered into base-level members of dimensions and not into parent members.Multi-GAAP The Multi-GAAP dimension is an optional dimension that is used if you need to report your financial statements in both local GAAP and in IFRS or other GAAP. In some cases. . 47 . the system provides the following dimension members: l IFRS l Local GAAP l Adjustments to IFRS To specify Multi-GAAP reporting during application creation. You can rename members to reflect the correct GAAP adjustment if needed. Values for parent-level members are aggregated from the children of the parent-level members. All members below a parent are referred to as descendants. and a member immediately below a parent member is referred to as its child. This dimension tracks the local GAAP data input as well as any GAAP adjustments. data for base-level members is calculated.

Prev. l Click Start. 4 Perform an action: l Click Expand. 6 Click Search Down 48 . or partial string for which to search. l Click Collapse. . 3 For Dimension. or Both. l Press the Left Arrow. ä To collapse dimensions or members: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Click Expand l Click the closed folder. l In Page.3 For Dimension. 3 For Dimension. enter the page to view and click Go or press Enter. 14 members are displayed per page. 4 For Search. By default. 4 Perform an action: . 5 Enter the member name. select the dimension and member to expand. select Name. l Click the open folders. or End to view other pages. Navigating Dimension Hierarchies l Press the Up Arrow to move to the previous member. Alias. . click Dimensions. select the dimension to collapse. or Search Up . select the dimension for the member. click Dimensions. l Click Collapse . You can change this by setting preferences for Show the Specified Members on Each Dimensions Page Finding Dimensions or Members ä To find dimension members in dimension hierarchies: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Press the Down Arrow to move to the next member. Next. alias.

5 For Sort. Moving Members Within the Dimension Hierarchy You can move one member or a group of members in the same branch. select the dimension with the members to move. select the dimension for the members to move. . select the dimension for the members. 6 Click Sort Ascending 7 Click OK. 4 Select the member or branch to move. the outline is generated with members in the order that is displayed. select the members whose children or descendants you want to sort. 5 Perform an action: l Click Move Up l Click Move Down . 49 . Sorting by children affects only members in the level immediately below the selected member. Sorting members affects the outline. ä To move members or branches among siblings: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 For Dimension. 5 Click Cut. ä To move members. 3 For Dimension. click Dimensions. to sort by ascending order or Sort Descending to sort by descending order. select children or descendants. 4 On Dimensions. click Dimensions.Sorting Members You can sort members in ascending or descending order. . ä To sort members: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Sorting by descendants affects all descendants of the selected member. The next time you create or refresh the database. to move the member up one position. 3 For Dimension. 4 Select the member or branch to move. by children or descendants. including parents and children: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. to move the member down one position. click Dimensions.

Cut is not available for root dimension members. . 50 . click Dimensions. Showing Member Usage ä To view where members are used in an application: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 For Dimension. or logging of. 5 At the bottom of the Member Usage window. 4 Select the member in the dimension hierarchy. Custom dimensions are associated with the Account dimension and provide additional detail for accounts. navigating to different pages. you can create up to two additional Custom dimensions based on your application needs. 6 Click Go. . 7 Click Close. 8 Click OK. deleting members. 7 Click Paste. the system adds it to the end of the Dimensions list. 6 Click Close.You cannot Cut members after adding or editing dimensions. When you create a dimension. Adding Custom Dimensions In addition to the system predefined dimensions. 9 Update and validate business rules and reports. The Dimensions list displays all of the dimensions for the application. select where in the application to view the member's usage. select a dimension. click Dimensions. 6 Click the destination level under which to move the members. Viewing a Member’s Ancestors ä To view a member’s ancestors: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 Select the dimension whose member usage you want to view. 5 Click Show Ancestors. 4 Click Show Usage.

depending on how the data was originally derived. About Dynamic Calc With dynamically calculated members. Store Stores data values of members. Changing a member's storage to Dynamic Calc may result in loss of data. The limit is 100 children under a Dynamic Calc parent. security. Dynamic Calc Calculates data values of members. Use Dynamic Calc 51 . and disregards the values. Shared Allows members in the same dimension to share data values. You may need to update outlines. Never Share Prohibits members in the same dimension from sharing data values. Aggregation options determine how child member values aggregate to parent members: l + Addition l .When you add Custom dimensions. regardless of hierarchy) Data Storage Options Table 4 Data Storage Options Option Impact Dynamic Calc and Store Calculates data values of members. alias. and attributes. including name. calculations. and stores values. the system calculates data values of members. Label Only Has no data associated with the member.Subtraction l * Multiplication l / Division l % Percent l ~ Ignore l Never (do not aggregate. Aggregation Options You can define calculations within dimension hierarchies using aggregation options. and disregards these values. or both to get the dynamically calculated value. you define their properties. Dynamic Calc Versus Dynamic Calc and Store In most cases. you can optimize calculations and lower disk usage by using Dynamic Calc instead of Dynamic Calc and Store when calculating members of sparse dimensions.

use Never Share. Retrieval time may be significantly lower than for Dynamic Calc and Store. Label Only Data Storage Label-only members are virtual members. Currencies. . With this combination. new totals for parents are not calculated when users save and refresh forms. you cannot apply label-only storage to members of these dimensions: Entity. Note: l You cannot assign level 0 members as label-only. l Label-only members can display values. You can use Never Share for parent members with only one child member that aggregates to the parent. Shared Data Storage Use Shared to allow alternate rollup structures in the application.and Store for members of sparse dimensions with complex formulas. and user-defined custom dimensions. Do not use Dynamic Calc for a parent member if you enter data for that member in a target version. For data values accessed concurrently by many users. use Dynamic Calc. l Making dimension members label-only minimizes database space by decreasing block size. to apply access to the child member. l You cannot assign attributes to label-only members. or that users retrieve frequently. and does not significantly lower disk usage. Store Data Storage Do not set parent members to Store if their children are set to Dynamic Calc. Never Share Data Storage The default data storage type is Never Share when you add user-defined custom dimensions. Dynamic Calc and Store provides only a small decrease in retrieval time and regular calculation time. they are typically used for navigation and have no associated data. Data Storage for children of label-only parents is set to Never Share by default. For members of dense dimensions. Versions. use Dynamic Calc. Data values are not saved for Dynamic Calc members. Note: l l l Do not use Dynamic Calc for base-level members for which users enter data. Parent members set to Dynamic Calc are read-only in target versions. To store exchange rates. l l 52 In a multicurrency application.

3 Click Add 4 Specify the dimension properties. 6 Click OK. Description Optional: Enter a description. Instead. or select an existing dimension and click Edit . .Caution! Table 5 Do not design forms in which label-only parents follow their first child member. Alias Optional: Select an alias table. Valid for Application Types Select application types for which the dimension is valid. Properties for Custom Dimensions Property Value Dimension Enter a name that is unique across all dimensions. Clearing this option makes all members of the dimension invalid for the deselected type. The default is Never Share. Otherwise. click Dimensions. 53 . . Enter a unique alternate name for the dimension. create forms with label-only parents selected before their children. ä To add or change Custom dimensions: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Setting Dimension Properties Table 6 Dimension Properties Property Value Dimension Enter a dimension name. Description Optional: Enter a description. Click Refresh to revert to the previous values and keep the page open. must be selected before assigning access rights to dimension members. Apply Security Allow security to be set on the dimension members. as you cannot save data in the first child member. dimensions have no security and users can access members without restriction. Alias Optional: Select an alias table and enter an alternate name of up to 80 characters. Valid for Application Types Select application types for which the dimension is valid. or do not select label-only parents for forms. Data Storage Select a data storage option. 5 Click Save.

Select Member Name or Alias to display members or aliases. 5 Set the order of precedence by selecting a dimension and clicking Move Up 54 . Custom attributes cannot be assigned to dense dimensions. To optimize performance for sparse dimensions. Enable custom attribute display for dimensions with attributes. Enable custom attribute display Display available and selected attributes for dimensions with associated attributes. The system designates the Account and Period dimensions as dense. and the remaining dimensions as sparse. the system searches for and calculates only occupied data values in each dimension combination. Must be selected before assigning access rights to dimension members. Display Option Set application default display options for the Member Selection dialog box. Member Name:Alias displays members on the left and aliases on the right. Alias:Member Name displays aliases on the left and members on the right. ä To manage performance settings: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Setting Dimension Density and Order The Performance Settings tab enables you to set dimensions as sparse or dense and set their order of precedence. . At least one dense dimension is required. 3 Select Performance Settings. 4 For each dimension. Dense dimensions have data values for the majority of member combinations. click Dimensions. set its Density as Dense or Sparse. Data Storage Select data storage options: l Store l Dynamic Calc and Store l Dynamic Calc l Never Share l Shared l Label Only See “Data Storage Options” on page 51.Property Value Apply Security Allow security to be set on dimension members. If you do not select this option. there is no security on the dimension. and users can access its members without restriction. Sparse and Dense Dimensions Sparse dimensions lack data values for the majority of member combinations. reducing calculation time and disk usage. or Move Down .

Defining Accounts The Account dimension defines the chart of accounts for an application. l Remove All moves selected dimensions. 7 Click Save.Setting the Evaluation Order The Evaluation Order tab enables you to specify which data type prevails when a data intersection has conflicting data types. FCCS_IncomeStatement. The data type “Unspecified” does not conflict with another data type. 3 Select Evaluation Order. 5 From Available Dimensions. the system creates these types of Account members: l System members 55 . 4 Select the Application type and click Go. By default. set the order of precedence by clicking Move Up or Move Down . For example. and Product members are set to the Smart List data type. removes all dimensions. if Account members are set to the Currency data type. When you create an application. select dimensions and move them to Selected Dimensions: . click Dimensions. their data type is not “Unspecified”). Note: Pre-seeded members have the prefix FCCS. You need to select only dimensions whose members have specific data types (that is. for example. The only modification that you can make to pre-seeded members is to edit the member description or alias. you can set whether the Currency or Smart List data type prevails at an intersection. ä To set evaluation order: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Remove removes selected dimensions. l Add l Add All moves all dimensions. and adds additional system members based on the features that you enable for the application. 6 If you select multiple dimensions. the system creates the Account dimension with a hierarchy of pre-seeded members.

Depending on which ratios you want to include as part of the application. Expense l Balance account types: Asset. Account types determine how child accounts are aggregated to parent accounts and how account balances accumulate over time. Ratio accounts required to perform the ratio calculation are optional system members. Gross Profit Margin Shared members l Some pre-seeded members are also added to an alternate hierarchy as shared members. Balance Account types represent a balance at a specific period and therefore do not aggregate over time. Examples of expenses are: standard cost of sales. you can only change the Alias or Description. those accounts will be pre-seeded. For example. Balance Sheet Optional system members l These members are created based on application features that you enabled. Equity Table 7 Account Types Account Type Description Expense Costs incurred by a company to generate revenue. Flow Account types accumulate over time. all the Account members listed under Income Statement or Balance Sheet system members which are set for a Cash Flow category have a shared instance created under the selected category in Cash Flow. Examples: Income Statement. l Flow account types: Revenue. You cannot rename them. Liability. This determination enables you to build financial calculations directly into the chart of accounts. Each account is categorized as either Flow or Balance. For example. You cannot change them in the hierarchy as they must be the parent member.These members are parent-level members created when the application is created. Account Types Each account is associated with an Account type. 56 . Account types determine whether child values are added to or subtracted from their parent value. travel expense. salary expense. Examples: Return on Sales.

The aggregation rule is based on the Account type for the member and the Account type for its parent. Aggregation (Consolidation Operator) The Account type determines how a member aggregates into its direct Parent member. Account types either replace or override the Aggregation factor for the member. miles traveled. and patients admitted. However. you can change the consolidation operator. Liability Legal debts and obligations that companies owe to third parties as a result of business operations. accounts receivable and pre-paid insurance. 57 . and retained earnings. because the system considers the relationship between the base member and its parent Account type. or subtracted from it. and notes payable.Account Type Description Revenue Income received as a result of the sale of goods or services. Saved Assumption Non-financial items used by a company for analysis and reporting purposes. Equity The value of ownership in a company. Examples of assets are inventory. Examples of liabilities include accounts payable. The relationship between the Parent and Child Account types determines if a child is summed into its parent. only Saved Assumption is userdefined. See “Aggregation Options” on page 51. By default. Calculated as the amount of assets remaining after all debts are satisfied. accrued payroll. units sold. Examples are square footage and headcount. Examples of equity accounts include common stock. the Consolidation property is set by the system. Summary of Account Types Table 8 Summary of Account Types Account Type Time Balance Variance Reporting Revenue Flow Non-Expense Expense Flow Expense Asset Balance Non-Expense Liability Balance Non-Expense Equity Balance Non-Expense Saved Assumption User-defined User-defined Variance reporting and time balance settings are system-defined. Income from Sales of Fixed Assets Asset A resource that has economic value and from which the company expects to generate income over time. Account types are different from the Aggregation (consolidation) factors such as Addition and Subtraction. preferred stock. Examples of revenue include Trade Sales. fixed assets.

Time Balance Property Time balance specifies how the system calculates the value of summary time periods. Jan: 10 Feb: 15 Mar: 20 Q1: 45 First Beginning value in a summary time period as the period total. ASSET account values are added into parent ASSET and EXPENSE accounts. and the resulting value for Total Assets is 80. when aggregated. the Amortization value of 20 is subtracted.The following table indicates how an Account type behaves when totaled into a specific type of parent account. For example. Total Assets is an ASSET account and the parent of Fixed Assets (an ASSET account) and Amortization (a LIABILITY account). The columns represent the Account type of the parent accounts. the Fixed Assets value of 100 is added. Table 10 Time Balance Properties Time Balance Property Description Example Flow Aggregate of all values for a summary time period as a period total. Table 9 Account Type Behaviors During Aggregation into Parent Accounts Parent Account Account Type Asset Liability Equity Revenue Expense Saved Assumption ASSET Add Sub Sub Sub Add Add LIABILITY Sub Add Add Add Sub Add EQUITY Sub Add Add Add Sub Add REVENUE Sub Add Add Add Sub Add EXPENSE Add Sub Sub Sub Add Add SAVED ASSUMPTION Add Add Add Add Add Add This example illustrates how account types are aggregated into parent accounts: In this example. Jan: 10 Feb: 15 Mar: 20 Q1: 20 Average Average for all the child values in a summary time period as the period total. When the accounts are aggregated into the parent account. Jan: 10 Feb: 15 Mar: 20 Q1: 10 Balance Ending value in a summary time period as the period total. Jan: 10 Feb: 15 Mar: 20 Q1: 15 58 . and subtracted from parent LIABILITY and REVENUE accounts.

When you are budgeting nonexpense items. the default aggregation logic applies up to its parent. Assuming it is a leap year. the result is calculated: (10 * 31 + 15 * 28 + 20 * 31) / 90 = 15 Jan: 10 Feb: 15 Mar: 20 Q1: 15 You can use the Weighted Average . Assuming it is not a leap year. Balance. (2) Sum these values. When actual sales are less than budget. does not account for leap years. the variance is 10. Weighted Average Actual_Actual Weighted daily average. the variance is negative. if budgeted sales were $100. Non-Expense: The budgeted value is subtracted from the actual value to determine the variance. if budgeted expenses are $100. the variance is -10. (3) Divide the total by the number of days in Q1. Mar: 10. assuming that February has 28 days.Time Balance Property Fill Description Example The value set at the parent is filled into all its descendents. When actual expenses are greater than budget expenses. Jan: 10. Examples: l l When you are budgeting expenses for a time period. such as sales. based on the actual number of days in a year. For example. the actual expenses should be less than the budget. specify how database calculations treat zeros and missing values with the Skip options. the average for Q1 is calculated: (1) Multiply each month’s value in Q1 by the number of days in the month.Actual_365 time balance properties only with a standard monthly calendar that rolls up to four quarters. the result is calculated: (10 * 31 + 15 * 29 + 20 * 31) / 91 = 15 Jan: 10 Feb: 15 Mar: 20 Q1: 15 Weighted Average Actual_365 Weighted daily average. (3) Divide the total by the number of days in Q1. Setting Account Calculations for Zeros and Missing Values With time balance properties First. For example. in which February has 29 days. based on 365 days in a year. and Average. and actual sales were $110. Feb: 10. Q1: 30 Consolidation operators and member formulas overwrite Fill values when the members are recalculated. and actual expenses are $110. In the example. In the example. the variance is negative. the actual sales should be more than the budget. If a child value changes. (2) Sum these values. accounts for leap year. 59 . Account Types and Variance Reporting An account’s variance reporting property determines whether it is treated as an expense when used in member formulas: l l Expense: The actual value is subtracted from the budgeted value to determine the variance.Actual_Actual and Weighted Average . the average for Q1 is calculated: (1) Multiply each month’s value in Q1 by the number of days in the month.

and zeros are considered when calculating the parent value. In the example. and zero values are not considered when calculating parent values. l Percentage . l l Variance reporting determines the variance between budgeted and actual data.Stores and displays in the default currency. To determine the variance. and the value of the second child (Feb) is missing. Time balance determines the ending value for summary time periods. Jan: 0 Feb: 20 Mar: 25 Q1: 20 Missing and Zeros Excludes #MISSING and zero values when calculating parent values. In the example. In the example. the value of the first child (Jan) is #MISSING. the value of the first child (Jan) is zero. the system subtracts the actual amount from the budgeted amount. as an expense or non-expense. Data Types and Exchange Rate Types The Data type determines how values are stored in account members. so Q1 = second child (Feb). the value of the first child (Jan) is 0.Stores a numeric value and displays as a percent. Determine the final value for the summary time period by aggregating the number of units sold across time periods. 60 . Jan: 0 Feb: 20 Mar: 25 Q1: 0 Missing Excludes #MISSING values when calculating parent values. or 20.Table 11 Effect of Skip Options When Time Balance is Set to First Skip Option Description Example None Zeros and #MISSING values are considered when calculating parent values (the default). and the exchange rates used to calculate values. or 25. and #MISSING values are not considered when the calculating parent values. In the example. Jan: 0 Feb: #MISSING Mar: 25 Q1: 25 Saved Assumptions You use saved assumptions to identify key business drivers and ensure application consistency. l Non-currency . the value of the first child (Jan) is 0. Q1 = the third child (Mar).Stores and displays as a numeric value. Jan: #MISSING Feb: 20 Mar: 25 Q1: 20 Zeros Excludes zero values when calculating parent values. so Q1 = the second child (Feb). so Q1 = 0. Determine the value for office floor space by using the time period’s last value. or 20. assuming that the actual amount spent on headcount is less than the amount budgeted. Make an assumption about the number of product units sold at the end of the time period. Because missing and zero values are not considered when calculating parent values. by selecting time balance and variance reporting properties. Available data type for account member values: l Currency . Examples of how time balance and variance reporting properties are used with saved assumption account members: l l l Create a saved assumption of an expense type for variance reporting.

l Historical Amount Override l Historical Rate Override Note: The system always uses Average rate for Flow accounts. 4 On the Member Properties tab.Exchange rate in effect when. such as account types.Average exchange rate l Ending . For accounts with the Currency data type. select Account. see “Setting Intercompany Account Attributes” on page 64.Displays as text. Alias Table Optional: Select the alias table to store the alias name. 61 . these are exchange rate types: l Average . earnings for a Retained Earnings account were earned or assets for a Fixed Assets account were purchased. and whether they are Intercompany accounts. For Intercompany accounts. l Text .Displays as a date. Table 12 .Ending exchange rate l Historical . Account Properties Property Description Name Enter a name that is unique across all dimension members. ä To define account properties: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Dimensions. and Ending rate for Balance accounts. Defining Account Properties You define properties for accounts. enter account properties. for example. Description Optional: Enter a description. Alias Optional: Enter an alternate name for the member.l Date . 3 From the Dimension list. and data types.

l Average l Ending l Historical l Historical Amount Override l Historical Rate Override l No Rate Note: The system always uses Average rate for Flow accounts.Property Description Account Type Select the account type: l Expense l Revenue l Asset l Liability l Equity l Saved Assumption See “Account Types” on page 56. . Skip Select an option: l None l Missing l Zero l Missing and Zero See “Setting Account Calculations for Zeros and Missing Values” on page 59. Exchange Rate Type Indicates the exchange rate for the account. Source Cube 62 Specify the source cube for the member. Variance Reporting Select an option: l Expense l Non-Expense See “Account Types and Variance Reporting” on page 59. and Ending rate for Balance accounts. Time Balance Specify how the system calculates the value of summary time periods: See “Time Balance Property” on page 58.

Enter the maximum number of dynamicallyadded members that users can create. The default is 10. Smart Lists Optional: Select a Smart List to associate with the member. Determines the access that member creators have to dynamic members that they create with a runtime prompt: l Inherit—The member creator will inherit the closest parent's access to the newly-created member. l None—The member creator will not be assigned any access to the newly-created member.Property Description Data Storage Select data storage options: l Store l Dynamic Calc and Store l Dynamic Calc l Never Share l Shared l Label Only See “Data Storage Options” on page 51. Number of Possible Dynamic Children This option is available if Enable for Dynamic Children is selected. l Write—The member creator will be assigned Write access to the newly-created member. they affect only future dynamic members. Allow Upper-Level Entity Input Specify whether parent Entity input is allowed for this account. Access Granted to Member Creator This option is available if Enable for Dynamic Children is selected. Note: If an administrator changes these settings.) l Read—The member creator will be assigned Read access to the newly-created member. Two Pass Calculation Select whether to calculate values of members based on values of parent members or other members. Data Type Select a data type: l Unspecified l Currency l NonCurrency l Percentage l Date l Text l Smart Lists See “Data Types and Exchange Rate Types” on page 60. they do not retroactively affect dynamic members. Application Type Indicates the application type for which the member is valid. (An administrator can later assign the member creator access to the members. 63 . Enable for Dynamic Children Enables users to create children for this member by entering a member name in the runtime prompt for a business rule that has been configured with a dynamic parent member).

The system also creates the Total Geography member by default. 2 Enter this information: Table 13 Intercompany Account Attribute Values Attribute Description Intercompany Account Specify if the account is an Intercompany account. The alias for the Default Alias Table for the new member must be set as the alias for the Entity. 3 Is Plug Account Specify if this account can be a Plug account. You can also leave this option blank. it must be set as the name of the added Entity. Defining Entity Members By default. ä To specify Intercompany Account values: 1 From the Account dimension. This member is used for system forms. Intercompany Property for Entities For Entity members. Note: This option is only available if Intercompany is enabled for the application.Setting Intercompany Account Attributes You specify Intercompany account attributes on the Attribute Values tab for the Account. The Global member is used to store information such as currency rates. the Entity dimension includes a Global member in the entity hierarchy. When the Intercompany property is set for an Entity. You define attributes for Entity dimension members. You cannot edit or rename it. you specify if the member stores Intercompany detail. and IsPlugAccount is not set. When you set the Intercompany Account property to Yes. such as the default currency and security class. If set to Yes. you must specify a Plug account. you can specify a Plug account. and you can create a hierarchy under it. If you set the Intercompany property for an Entity member. a new member must be created under the Intercompany dimension with the name ICP_<Entity Name>. a member with the same name is created in the Intercompany dimension. see “Adding or Editing Members” on page 66. If an alias is not defined. Plug Account For the accounts that have Intercompany set to Yes. Accounts with this property set to Yes can be selected as Plug Accounts. To define entity properties. a Plug account must be specified for this account. and to specify whether the entity allows adjustments. Click Save. 64 . select the Attribute Values tab. You then need to change the entity member selector in the forms appropriately. You can create new members as siblings to Total Geography.

values are converted to U. a member named ICP_UK must be created. The values are not stored. when an entity named UK is marked as Intercompany.S. Working with Members Subtopics l l l l l l l Dynamic Members Adding or Editing Members Deleting Members Deleting Parent Members Viewing Member Properties from Forms Working with Shared Members Creating Shared Members You can assign access rights to members and rearrange the dimension member hierarchy. ä To enable a parent member for adding dynamic children: 1 Edit the parent member and select the option Enable for Dynamic Children. if U. you may specify Yen as the base currency for the Japan entity and U. If an Entity is marked as Intercompany and later the Intercompany property is removed.For example. The default base currency for entity members is the currency specified when creating the application. Dollars using the rates in the exchange rate table (assuming Yen is the local currency and U. Dollars is the default currency. If an alias is defined for UK. Dynamic Members Dynamic member are members with values that are dynamically calculated when the data is requested.S. if the display currency is set to U. Dollars for the United States entity. Dollars is the reporting currency). l Optional: Set the member property Number of Possible Dynamic Children (the default is 10). the same alias must be set to the new Intercompany member ICP_UK. the alias of the associated Intercompany member also must be changed to the new alias. specify each entity member’s base currency.S. the associated Intercompany member must be removed. the alias must be set to UK. Base Currency For a multicurrency application. If an alias is not defined for UK. If the alias of an Entity member that is marked as Intercompany changes.S. For example. If all placeholders are used. When you use forms that have values for the Japan entity. subsequently 65 . This setting determines the number of placeholders that are created for dynamically adding or loading members under the parent.S. The most common type of dynamic calculation is ratio calculation. Dollars.

For Account members only: Variance Reporting 66 If the account type is Saved Assumptions. Alias Table Optional: Select the alias table to store the alias name. Alias Optional: Enter an alternate name for the member. . Designate the saved assumption as a Revenue. select Expense or Non-Expense.added children are added as normal members and cannot be used until the database is refreshed. Liability. l See “Defining Accounts” on page 55. for Variance Reporting. For Account members only: Account Type Select an account type: l Revenue l Expense l Asset l Liability l Equity l Saved Assumption See “Account Types” on page 56. Table 14 Member Properties Property Value Name Enter a name that is unique across all dimension members. l 2 Optional: Set the member property Access Granted to Member Creator (the default is Inherit). For Entity members only: Base Currency Select the base currency for the Entity member. Asset. In addition to the member properties in this list. Refresh the database to create the placeholders for dynamic members in the databases in which the members are used. Description Optional: Enter a description. Adding or Editing Members You define properties for dimension members using these values. l See “Setting Up Currencies” on page 71. some dimensions require additional member properties. or Equity account. l See “Defining Entity Members” on page 64. l See “Setting Up Scenarios” on page 77.

Allow Upper-Level Entity Input Specify whether parent Entity input is allowed for this member. Application Type Select the application type for which the member is valid.Actual_365 See “Time Balance Property” on page 58. For Account members only: Skip Select an option: l None l Missing l Zero l Missing and Zero See “Setting Account Calculations for Zeros and Missing Values” on page 59.Property Value For Account members only: Time Balance Select an option: l Flow l First l Balance l Average l Fill l Weighted Average . Data Storage Select a data storage property. For Account members only: Exchange Rate Type Select an option: l Average l Ending l Historical l Historical Amount Override l Historical Rate Override l No Rate For Account members only: Source Cube Specify the source cube for the member. The default is Never Share for new custom dimension members (except root members). 67 . l Store l Dynamic Calc and Store l Dynamic Calc l Never Share l Shared l Label Only Two Pass Calculation Specify whether to recalculate values of members based on values of parent members or other members. Available for Account and Entity members with Dynamic Calc or Dynamic Calc and Store properties.Actual_Actual l Weighted Average .

select a dimension. they affect only future dynamic members. they do not retroactively affect dynamic members. select the level of the dimension hierarchy to which to add a sibling and click Add Sibling. select that member from the dimension hierarchy and press Enter or click Edit. (An administrator can later assign the member creator access to the members. To add a sibling. 68 . Enable for Dynamic Children Enables users to create children for this member by entering a member name in the runtime prompt for a business rule that has been configured with a dynamic parent member). click Next. Determines the access that member creators have to dynamic members that they create with a runtime prompt: l Inherit—The member creator will inherit the closest parent's access to the newly-created member. On Member Properties. To edit a member. Note: If an administrator changes these settings. Smart Lists Optional: Select a Smart List to associate with the member. click Dimensions. Number of Possible Dynamic Children This option is available if Enable for Dynamic Children is selected. l Write—The member creator will be assigned Write access to the newly-created member. If you do not see the new member on the page. set or change member properties described in the table above. Access Granted to Member Creator This option is available if Enable for Dynamic Children is selected. select the parent level of the dimension hierarchy to which to add a member and click Add Child.Property Value Data Type Select a data type: l Unspecified l Currency l NonCurrency l Percentage l Date l Text l Smart Lists See “Data Types and Exchange Rate Types” on page 60. The default is 10. 3 From the Dimension list. Enter the maximum number of dynamically-added members that users can create.) l Read—The member creator will be assigned Read access to the newly-created member. ä To add or edit members: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 4 Perform an action: l l l 5 . l None—The member creator will not be assigned any access to the newly-created member. To add a child member.

select the entity member to delete. Deleting dimension members or deselecting the application type results in data loss when refreshing an application. Caution! Before starting this procedure. click Dimensions. and so on) by using Show Usage. ä To delete members: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 6 Update and validate rules and reports. See “Working with Attributes” on page 80. 4 Click Delete. exchange rates. Deleting a base member also deletes its shared members. you typically complete these tasks: l l Assign access. perform a backup. You must delete the entity member throughout the application before deleting it from Dimensions. For example. Deleting Parent Members Data values are identified by a set of dimension member values and an application type. Before deleting members. 5 Click OK. 69 . . Deleting Members Each data value is identified by a set of dimension member values and an application type. See the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System Backup and Recovery Guide.6 Click Save to save information to the relational database and see changes in the dimension hierarchy. 7 Refresh the database so that edited members are visible to users entering data. Deleting dimension members or deselecting the application type results in data loss when refreshing the application. you must delete it from the form before deleting it from Dimensions. See the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System Backup and Recovery Guide. 8 After creating a dimension member. See “Managing Security” in the Getting Started with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud. perform a backup. if the entity member is used in a form. Caution! Before starting this procedure. Specify attributes. understand where in the application they are used (in which forms. 3 From the dimension hierarchy.

Shared member values can be ignored to avoid double-counting values when you roll up the outline. then click Cancel. You must delete shared members and recreate them under different parent members.ä To delete a parent member and all its descendants from the dimension hierarchy: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Shared members must be at the lowest level 70 . 3 On the Home page. 6 Select the dimension whose member and descendants to delete. click Dimensions. Shared members cannot be moved to another parent member. and member formulas are not allowed for shared members. 4 Optional: Select Edit to view the member's properties. click Console. 8 Click Delete. A base member must display before its shared members in position from top to bottom. click Data Analysis and then select a form. select a row or column member and right-click. such as member name. Shared members share some property definitions with base members. Shared members are available for Account and user-defined custom dimensions. 3 Select Show properties in outline. custom attribute values. select the dimension whose member that you want to delete. 5 From the Dimension list. alias name. 4 On the Application tab. and application types for which members are valid. Viewing Member Properties from Forms ä To view member properties from forms: 1 On the Home page. A base member must exist before you can create a shared member. . Working with Shared Members Sharing members allow alternate rollup structures within an application. Shared members must have unique parent members and different rollup aggregation settings. base currency. 9 Click OK. 7 Select the member whose branch to delete. Note: Shared members are not supported for Entity. Custom attributes. The Dimensions page displays the member highlighted in the hierarchy. You can create multiple shared members for the base member. 2 In the form. and alternate hierarchies are not supported. click Dimensions. Renaming base members renames all shared members.

Shared members are displayed similarly to base members in the dimension hierarchy for member selection in Oracle Smart View for Office. The base member need not be level zero. Creating Shared Members You create shared members the same way as other members. The values are never stored for reporting currency members. EUR. You can disable a currency as a reporting currency. The system only stores Entity Currency and Parent Currency values. l You cannot add a shared member as a sibling to the base member. You can enter data in shared members. l l You must give the shared member the same name as its base member. You must select Shared as the Data Storage for the shared member. 71 . Note: You cannot edit or delete the Entity Currency and Parent Currency members. Reporting currency members are dynamic calculation members where the translation occurs dynamically when the data is retrieved. the system creates input currencies such as USD. Converted reporting currency values are stored and read-only for all users.(level zero) in the hierarchy and cannot have children. with these differences: l The base member cannot be the parent of the shared member. The system supports currency conversion from local currencies to one or more reporting currencies. An application’s default currency is the default reporting currency. Setting Up Currencies Subtopics l l l l l l l Working with Multiple Currencies Scaling Number Formatting Viewing Currency Usage Creating Currencies Editing Currencies Deleting Currencies By default. and values are stored with base members. GBP. It can have a different description. and so on. which by default has two mandatory members: l Entity Currency l Parent Currency A reporting currency is the currency in which your company prepares financial statements. It also creates reporting currencies. You can only specify an Alias.

Working with Multiple Currencies If an application supports multiple currencies. Where there are children with mixed currencies. If an alias is not defined. When you add a new currency to the Currency dimension. it must be set as the name of the added currency. and each currency that is selected as a reporting currency counts as two currencies (original currency and reporting currency). Valid currencies for data entry are displayed in a list that users access by clicking the Currency link during data entry. For example. If the local currency member is selected. These codes are calculated in dimension formulas and business rules. The application’s main currency is by default a reporting currency. it must be set as GBP for From_GBP. the alias of the associated From Currency member must also be changed to the new alias. users can select different display options. a new member called From_GBP must be created in the From Currency dimension. of whom only one child has an overridden currency. Currency codes associated with input values are stored as numeric values. Currencies defined for the application are valid currencies for data entry.Each application is limited to 45 currencies. Users can enter data values only into local currency members. . You can change which currencies are reporting currencies. The alias for the Default Alias table for the new member must be set as the alias for the currency. If a parent has multiple children. If multiple currencies are enabled. you can enable multiple currencies per entity on forms. If an alias is defined for GBP. If a Currency member is removed. users can see values converted from the local currency to a reporting currency and can override a cell’s base currency. you must create a new member under the From Currency dimension with the name From_Currency. Users cannot enter data into cells displayed in reporting currencies. You can set dimension properties for each currency in the Edit Currency dialog box. the associated From_Currency member must be removed. all currencies specified for the application are available as input types. the default stored and displayed currency for cells is the entity’s base currency (which you specify). and can select Currency Setting to apply the properties set by the administrator. The calculated values of these currency codes may translate to currency codes that are incorrect or invalid. the parent inherits the overridden currency code (which is not displayed on forms). when a currency called GBP is added to the Currency dimension. review calculated results on the upper levels. If an alias is not defined for GBP. Currencies can be converted only to reporting currencies. the same alias must be set to From_GBP also. In preferences. Note: l l l l l l 72 When the local currency is selected on forms. If the alias of a Currency member changes.

is used for triangulation currency or by an entity. Ensure that a currency rate is entered for each combination of local currencies and selected currencies on forms or reports. When you select Yen as the currency member for the form. Number Formatting You can determine the initial display of numerical values for non-currency and currency data types in forms: l l l l Thousands separator: m None: 1000 m Comma: 1.000 m Space: 1 000 Decimal separator: m Dot: 1000. Scaling You can specify scaling data values when displayed in certain currencies.000 m Dot: 1.00 Negative number sign: m Prefixed minus: -1000 m Suffixed minus: 1000- m Parentheses: (1000) Negative number color: m Black m Red Viewing Currency Usage You can view how an application uses a currency: whether a currency is the default. you can set the scaling for Yen to Thousands.000 as a value for the Japan entity on a form with the Local member selected for the Currency dimension. then enter 10.l In certain cases. For example. parent entities display #MISSING when trying to convert to a selected currency.00 m Comma: 1000. Currency combinations must exist for all mixedcurrency children entities and parent members. the scaling is applied and 10 displays as the value for Japan. or has a conversion or exchange relationship with other currencies. 73 .

decimal separator. select how to enter and display the currency. select Select standard Currencies. Optional: For Scale. select the currency to use as the common third currency for conversion. 3 yen represents 3000 yen if scaling is set to thousands. Optional: For Triangulation Currency. enter a symbol or select a symbol from the list. m m m 74 . and color Whether it is a reporting currency ä To create currencies: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 Select Currencies. . select the alias table to use. such as Japanese yen. l To create a currency. click Dimensions. . including thousands separator. negative sign. For example. enter a name. m Optional: For Description. You can specify: l The three-letter code l The symbol l A description of up to 256 characters l The scaling factor to use when values are displayed l The triangulation currency to use for currency conversion l The alias table to use to display aliases l l Number formatting. Creating Currencies Select from a predefined list or create your own. 5 Click Show Usage. 5 From Create Currency: l To add a predefined currency. enter an abbreviation or identifier of up to three characters. 3 Select Currency. 4 Click Add. select Create new currency and specify properties: m For Code. 4 Select the currency for which you want information. Optional: For Alias Table.ä To see how currencies are used: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. m For Symbol. click Dimensions.

8 Optional: For Decimal Separator. 15 Click Save. select the display color. 6 Modify properties: l . select how to display numbers with decimal values (it must differ from the thousands separator). select how to display the thousands separator (it must differ from the decimal separator). click Dimensions. 11 Optional: Select the type of Data Storage. select Reporting Currency. enter a name for the currency alias. 3 Select Currency. l For Scale. l To change the currency’s symbol. enter or select the symbol. 9 Optional: For Negative Sign. for Symbol. 13 Optional: Select the Data Type. select how to display negative numbers: l Prefixed minus: -1000. 75 . select one from the Select from Predefined Symbols drop-down list. 12 Optional: Select Two Pass Calculation. select a number from 1 to 10 from the Precision drop-down list. To select from the predefined symbols. set how to enter and display the currency. l For set currency precision (the number of digits to the right of the decimal place). 6 Optional: Select Reporting Currency. 14 Optional: Select a Smart List.m Optional: For Alias. None is the default. 7 Optional: For Thousands Separator. 5 Click Edit. l Suffixed minus: 1000- l Parentheses: (1000) 10 Optional: For Negative Color. Editing Currencies ä To edit currencies: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l To specify the currency as a reporting currency. 4 Select the currency to edit.

4 For Currency. 3 For Dimension. You cannot delete a currency that meets these criteria. If you delete a currency defined in the exchange rate table. select the display color. a triangulation currency. Click Save. select Currencies. ä To delete currencies: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 6 Click Close. Deleting Currencies You cannot delete the default currency. click Dimensions. For Negative Color.l l l l 7 For Thousands Separator. select how to display the thousands separator (it must differ from the decimal separator). and OK. m Suffixed Minus: 1000- m Parentheses: (1000) m Use Default Setting: Apply the display setting for the currency. . or associated with an entity. select how to display numbers with decimal values (it must differ from the thousands separator). Delete. 7 Update and validate business rules and reports. OK. select how to display negative numbers: m Prefixed Minus: -1000. 76 . it is deleted from the table. For Decimal Separator. For Negative Sign. select the currency to delete. 5 Click Show Usage to determine if the currency is the default currency.

Creating Scenarios ä To create scenarios: 1 Click the Navigator icon . Access Permissions Specify access permissions to Scenario dimension members for groups or users to determine who can view or modify data. Years and periods outside of the range display as read-only. About Scenarios Use scenarios to: l Create forecasts. Write. l Report on scenarios. and specify the Beginning Balance time period. l Associate scenarios with different time periods or exchange rates. When users access forms. A user or group can have only one of these access permissions: Read. they can submit or promote the data for the entity to other users for review and approval. Access permissions for a user can be combined based on groups to which the user belongs. l Enter data into scenarios. 77 . they can enter into that scenario only years and periods within the range.Setting Up Scenarios Subtopics l l l l l About Scenarios Creating Scenarios Editing Scenarios Deleting Scenarios Copying Scenarios Each scenario contains data for accounts and other dimensions of each entity. After users enter data for an entity for a scenario. l Compare and analyze scenarios. or None. l Assign user access rights by scenario. You can modify the time range. Time Periods Assign each scenario a range of years and time periods.

78 . select an exchange rate table to associate with the scenario. Editing Scenarios ä To modify scenarios: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 5 For Scenario. 6 Optional: For Description. select an exchange rate table to associate with the scenario. If an application uses multiple currencies. 8 For Start Yr. select the time period to associate with the scenario.2 Under Administer. 3 For Dimension. select the time period to associate with the scenario. 9 Optional: For Exchange Rate Table. End Yr. associate a scenario with an exchange rate table to enable currency conversion. 11 Optional: Select Enabled for Process Management to include this scenario in approvals. 8 Optional: For Exchange Rate Table.. 9 Optional: For Alias. . 4 Click Add Child. 7 Optional: For Description. 7 For Start Yr. enter a description. 3 Select Scenarios. If an application uses multiple currencies. click Dimensions. associate a scenario with an exchange rate table to enable currency conversions.. click Dimensions. and End Period. select Scenario. 12 Click Save.. End Yr. Start Period. 12 Click Save. 10 Optional: Select Include BegBal as Time Period to include the BegBalance time period in this scenario for currency conversion. enter a description. select an alias table to associate with the scenario. and End Period. enter a name. and enter the description. select an alias table to associate with the scenario. 11 Optional: Select Enabled for Process Management to use this scenario in approvals.. enter a name. 4 Select the scenario to edit. 5 Click Edit. 10 Optional: For Alias. 6 Optional: For Scenario. and enter a description. Start Period.

3 Select Scenarios. 3 Select Scenarios. and End Period. Data values and access rights associated with the original scenario are not copied to the new scenario. associate a scenario with an exchange rate table to enable currency conversion. and enter a description. You cannot delete scenarios assigned to an axis on a form. 5 Click Copy Scenario. 12 Click Save. 6 For Copy to Scenario. ä To copy scenarios: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.Deleting Scenarios When you delete scenarios. select an exchange rate table to associate with the scenario. 5 Click Delete. 9 Optional: For Exchange Rate Table. 7 Update and validate business rules and reports. click Dimensions. 8 For Start Yr. 10 Optional: For Alias Table. select the time period to associate with the scenario. 11 Optional: Select Enabled for Process Management to include this scenario in approvals. 4 Select the scenario to copy. At least one scenario must remain in the application. Start Period.. You must first remove references to scenarios from forms and assign different scenarios. enter a name.. ä To delete scenarios: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Dimensions. . enter a description. 6 Click OK. select an alias table to associate with the scenario. 7 Optional: For Description. Copying Scenarios Only scenario properties are copied. 79 . End Yr. . all references to the scenario are deleted. 4 Select the scenarios to delete. If an application uses multiple currencies.

80 . You can assign attributes to sparse dimensions only. you specify a range of years. ä To edit years: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Working with Attributes Use attributes to group members using the same criterion. 4 Click Add Years. you can increase the number of years used in the application. After the application is created. and then enter an alias name. . 6 Click Add Years. but you cannot decrease the number of years in the application. . ä To add years to the calendar: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 Select Years. enter the number of years to add to the calendar. Editing Year Information You can add or update the description and alias for a year. 6 For Alias Table. click Dimensions. click Dimensions. 5 Enter a description for the year. Attribute dimensions do not have aggregation properties because parents are dynamically calculated. select the alias table to use. You can add a range of years either onto the end of the last defined year or before the first defined year. Adding Years to the Calendar You can add years to the application calendar. 3 Select Years.Customizing Application Years When you create an application. 5 For Number of Years to Add. You cannot assign attributes to label-only members. 4 Click Edit. 7 Click Save.

click Alias. characters are compared. all attributes and attribute values for that dimension are automatically deleted. 5 In the Dimension Properties dialog box. Boolean. Understanding Attribute Data Types Attribute dimensions can have a data type of text. . or calculating data. Boolean. 6 Select options: l l l 7 To create attributes. or alias. For example. you can use the number of ounces specified in an Ounces attribute to calculate profit per ounce for each product. a package type Bottle is less than a package type Can because B precedes C in the alphabet. You cannot modify the data type after the attribute is created. date attribute values must be entered in the correct format. click Dimensions. or date that enables different functions for grouping. 3 Select a sparse dimension for which to define an attribute. Type an attribute name. If you change a dimension from sparse to dense. 4 Select the top level in the dimension hierarchy. and select a data type: Text. Boolean. Select an alias table. such as Equal and GreaterOrEqual. and update the attribute name. When you perform such comparisons. Numeric attribute dimensions use numeric values for the names of level 0 members. and numeric and date attribute dimensions must have at least one attribute value defined. or Numeric. When you click Close. attribute value. Attributes can have data types of text. Click Close. so you cannot assign attributes to it unless it is changed to sparse for all application types. and numeric. date. and click Edit. If the dimension is not sparse. For example. Date. type an alias name.The Account dimension is usually defined as dense. When attributes are defined. ä To create and change attributes. the hierarchy is validated and an error displays if issues are detected. and click Close. You can also associate numeric attributes with ranges of 81 . select an attribute and an attribute value. l l Text attributes enable basic attribute member selection and attribute comparisons in calculations. The attribute type applies only to level 0 members of the attribute dimension. Only sparse dimensions can contain attributes. selecting. and aliases: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Modify. To set aliases for attributes. Custom Attributes is not available. numeric. click Create. To modify attributes. you can use the Member Selection dialog box to select attribute functions. click Custom Attributes. 8 Update and validate rules and reports. For example. attribute values. You can include the names (values) of numeric attribute dimension members in calculations.

you can assign it to members of that dimension. are created for this attribute dimension by default. 8 Update and validate rules and reports. l l Boolean attribute dimensions in a database contain only two members. Data values for attribute values are dynamically calculated but not stored. Working with Attribute Values Attribute values provide users with another way of selecting dimensions members when using forms. 4 Click Custom Attributes. for example. ä To delete attributes: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. True and False. click Delete. click Dimensions. . 6 Above the Attributes column. which are typically the Entity and userdefined custom dimensions. Creating Attribute Values You can define attribute values for sparse dimensions. A base dimension. Attribute values are removed from members to which they had been assigned. 7 Click OK. 3 Select the sparse dimension for which to delete an attribute. Date attributes can specify the date format as month-day-year or day-month-year. comparing dates in a calculation that selects product sales since 12-22-1998. two attribute values. Deleting Attributes When you delete an attribute. 5 Select the attribute to delete. for example. can be associated with only one attribute dimension that has the Boolean data type. When a Boolean attribute dimension is added. You can use date attributes in calculations. and sequence information accordingly. and click Edit. to analyze product sales by market population groupings.base dimension values. Users can set the date format by selecting an option in Attribute Dimension Date Format in Application Settings preferences. all attribute values associated with the attribute are also deleted. 82 . such as Account or Entity. and the attribute is removed from dimensions to which it was assigned. After you define an attribute value for a dimension.

select a member to which to assign an attribute value. ä To assign attribute values to members: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. enter a name. 8 Perform an action: l To assign the value to the selected member. 9 Press Enter or Save. 4 Select the top level in the dimension hierarchy. . Otherwise. For members assigned attribute values: Click View to change a member’s attribute value. . 5 Click Edit. 4 In the Dimension hierarchy. l 9 To remove all values from the selected member. select the value to remove and click Remove . errors display during refresh. 8 On Create Attribute Value. 3 Select the sparse dimension for which to create an attribute value. Attribute values must be assigned to the same-level sparse dimension members. click Dimensions.ä To create attribute values: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. . click Dimensions. you can click Add Child or Add Sibling. 6 On the Manage Attributes and Values page. click Remove All . 6 Select Attribute Values. If the options are available. 10 Click Cancel. select the attribute for which to specify a value. 83 . 7 Above the Attribute Values column. click Add l To remove a value from the selected member. Assigning Attribute Values to Members You can assign attribute values members of a dimension that are defined as sparse for all application types. click Create. 5 Click Custom Attributes. 3 Select the sparse dimension for whose member you want to assign an attribute value. 7 Select attribute values to assign to the member. in Name. Click Save.

10 Click Save. it is removed from custom dimension members to which it is assigned. enter a name. 4 Select the top level in the dimension hierarchy. . select attribute values to delete. 8 Above Attribute Values. 5 Click Custom Attributes. select Attribute Values. click Dimensions. click Delete. select the attribute value.Modifying Attribute Values ä To modify attribute values: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. select the attribute containing attribute values to delete. click Dimensions. Deleting Attribute Values When you delete an attribute value. 9 Click OK. 5 Click Custom Attributes. 8 Above the Attribute Values column. 4 Select the top level in the dimension hierarchy. Working with User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) You can use user-defined attributes (UDAs) within member formulas and reports. click Modify. . select the attribute containing the value to modify. For example: 84 . 10 Update and validate rules and reports. UDAs return lists of members associated with the attribute. in Name. To select all attribute values for deletion. 7 For Attribute Values. 6 For Attributes. 7 For Attribute Values. ä To delete attribute values: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 6 For Attributes. 9 On Modify Attribute Value. 3 Select the sparse dimension for which to modify an attribute value. 3 Select the sparse dimension containing the attribute for which to delete a value.

ä To select UDAs for members: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. For example. click Create. If you use the @XREF function to look up a data value in another database to calculate a value from the current database. Then you can base certain calculations on the New Products designation. create the same UDA for multiple dimensions. create a UDA named New for the Account and Entity dimensions to make it available for Account and Entity members. you can add the HSP_NOLINK UDA to members to prevent the @XREF function from being created on all application types that are not the source type selected for that member. UDAs are specific to dimensions. 6 Optional: To create a UDA. select a member and click Edit. you can create a UDA called New Products and assign this UDA to the new products in the Product dimension hierarchy. 85 . Creating UDAs ä To create UDAs: 1 Navigate to the UDA tab in Dimensions. removes all UDAs. Changing UDAs ä To change UDAs: 1 Navigate to the UDA tab in Dimensions. Deleting it removes it for all Account members. For example. click Create. creating a UDA for an Account member makes it available for non-shared Account members. To make UDAs available for multiple dimensions.l l For a Product dimension with several product members. removes selected UDAs. moves the selected UDAs to the Selected USA panel. 2 On UDA. click Dimensions. 3 Enter a name and click Save. 7 Select UDAs for the member by moving them to Selected UDA and clicking Save: l Add l Remove l Remove All . 3 Select the dimension for whose members to associate the UDA. 5 Select UDA. 4 From the dimension hierarchy.

6 Select options for the following fields: l . calculation scripts. you must update all member formulas. . The default is 0. 5 Select the Member Formula tab. and so on allowed in formulas. Working with Member Formulas You can define member formulas to combine operators. click Dimensions. Predefined formula expressions. calculation functions. that expand into a formula or value upon database refresh.2 On UDA. Deleting UDAs Deleting a UDA removes it for the dimension. ä To define member formulas: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Enter a whole number between 0 and 100000 (or use arrows to increase or decrease the number). 4 Select the member and click Edit. UDA. ä To delete UDAs: 1 Navigate to the UDA tab in Dimensions. function. l l 86 Data Storage—Select a data storage option. select a UDA and click Edit. Cube Note: A formula entered for the default cube is applied to all cubes unless it is overridden by a different formula entered for a specific cube. and numeric constants to perform calculations on members. dimension and member names. If you delete UDAs. 3 Change the name and click Save. 3 Select the dimension for whose member to add or change a formula. Member formulas can also include: l l Operator type. Solve Order—For aggregate storage plan types only. 2 Select the UDA and click Delete. member name. The default is Store. solve order specifies the order in which formulas are evaluated. The formulas for members that have a specified solve order are calculated in order from the lowest solve order to the highest. value. and reports that reference them. including Smart List values.

9 Click Save. clicking Reset restores the previous member formula information. to dimension members. Viewing Details of Formula Verification ä To view details of the member formula syntax verification: 1 On Member Formula. If the member formula is valid. 3 Click Save. click Show Details. French. German. these language combinations: l English. Spanish. 8 Optional: To check the validity of the member formula. Show Details is not selectable. “Managing Settings”. 2 If the member formula is not valid. see Chapter 16. or aliases. 87 . You can create and update alias tables. Working with Alias Tables Subtopics l l l l l l About Alias Tables Creating Alias Tables Editing or Renaming Alias Tables Deleting Alias Tables Clearing Alias Tables Copying Alias Tables About Alias Tables You can assign alternate names. To specify Alias Table settings. Before you click Save. and set a default alias table for the application. and Italian l Japanese and English l Korean and English l Turkish and English Note: You can set alias tables to display members in an application. define formulas for the member. click Verify Syntax. for example. click Verify Syntax.7 In the text box. Multiple alias tables support.

enter a name. select the alias table. . enter a name. 4 Click Delete. . 4 In Add . Deleting Alias Tables ä To delete alias tables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Alias Tables. You cannot delete the default alias table. 5 Click OK. . . click Add.Alias Table. 3 On the Alias Table page. 3 On the Alias Table page. 5 Click OK. 5 For Edit . click Alias Tables. click Alias Tables. ä To clear alias tables: 1 88 Click the Navigator icon . 6 Click OK. 4 Click Edit. select the alias table that you want to delete. Clearing Alias Tables You can clear the contents of alias tables. Editing or Renaming Alias Tables ä To edit or rename alias tables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 On the Alias Tables page.Alias Table.Creating Alias Tables ä To create alias tables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.

3 On the Alias Table page. The destination alias table must exist. Copying Alias Tables ä To copy alias tables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.2 Under Administer. . click Alias Tables. 6 Click Copy. 5 Select the destination alias table. 4 Click Clear Values. click Alias Tables. 5 Click OK. 4 Click Copy. select the alias table to copy. 3 On the Alias Table page. select the alias table to clear. 89 . Copying does not create tables. Clearing the alias table removes the contents of the table but does not remove the table.

90 .

............................. Jobs that are processing...........................................93 Jobs Overview Jobs are actions............................................ The Jobs console enables administrators to manage jobs in a central location.....................91 Viewing Pending Jobs and Recent Activity.........................Managing Jobs 4 In This Chapter Jobs Overview .......................................... such as exporting data or refreshing the database.......................... or have errors are listed under Recent Activity........92 Editing and Deleting Jobs ............. which you can start right away or schedule to run at intervals............ You can manage these types of jobs in the Jobs console: l Run rules l Import data l Import metadata l Export data l Export metadata l Refresh the database l Run Invalid Intersection Reports Viewing Pending Jobs and Recent Activity The Jobs console lists jobs that are in a pending state under Pending Jobs................................................................. have run and are completed....... 91 ...91 Scheduling Jobs. Note: Jobs are retained in the Jobs console for 90 days.

and then click Apply. daily. and yearly). ä To schedule jobs: 1 On the Home page. click Console. General tab. select filter l To search for a job.ä To view the job listings in the Jobs console: 1 On the Home page. . weekly. The Business Rules page lists the business rules that were created for the application. click the Filter icon options. . To filter the list of pending jobs and recent activity. click Console. click the name of the job. monthly. Rules—Launches a business rule. 4 On the Schedule Job page. Scheduling Jobs You can schedule when to run jobs (now or at a future time) and how often (once. 92 l Import Metadata—Runs a metadata import operation. 2 On the left. Import Data—Runs a data import operation. 2 On the left. click Jobs 3 Click Schedule Jobs. and then click the Search icon l To view details for jobs. enter text in the Search field. select the type of job: l . l Export Data—Runs a data export operation. . click Jobs 3 Perform a task: l .

Select when to run the job: l Run Now l Schedule starting from. Editing and Deleting Jobs You can only edit pending jobs. If a job is in a processing state. Enter a name for the job. l To make changes. click Previous. l Refresh Database—Launches the database refresh operation. click the Actions icon. ä To edit or delete a job: 1 On the Home page. l Invalid Intersection Reports—Runs an Invalid Intersection Report. 93 . and then select Edit or Delete. the name that you enter displays along with a systemgenerated job name. and then click Next. click Cancel. for example. 7 Select how often to run the job: l Run Once l Daily l Weekly l Monthly l Yearly 8 Click Next to continue. 10 From the Review page.5 6 l Export Metadata—Runs a metadata export operation. review your selection. You can delete one job or multiple jobs at once. a. you cannot edit or delete it. 4 To edit a job: . click Jobs 3 To the right of a pending job. make selections for when to run the job and how often. and delete only jobs that are pending or completed. MyWeeklyCubeRefresh. Select a job. 9 The Job Details page lists the operations that were saved as a job. and then select the time. l To cancel the job. click Console. . On the Edit Job page. and click Next. 2 On the left. In the job listing in the Jobs console. for example. click Finish. l To continue. MyWeeklyCubeRefresh: Refresh Database.

You cannot edit the job type or the job name. b. 5 94 To delete one or more jobs at once. select the check box next to the job or jobs that you want to delete. .Note: You can only edit the schedule of the job. and then click Finish. and then click Delete. Review your selections.

..96 Auditing Information Overview You can use the Audit Information feature to view the tasks performed by users................... including journal actions and open and close period tasks l User administration l Security l Clear Cell Details l Approvals The Audit Information page displays the following information: l Task—The task name l Time—Date and time l User Name l Action—For example. start time and end time..............................Auditing Tasks and Data 5 In This Chapter Auditing Information Overview ............................. By default.95 Configuring Audit Tasks....... user ID.................................................................... You can filter audited tasks by Task Group (for example........................ Metadata Administration... the system logs these user activities in the task audit: l Data l Metadata Administration l Data Form definition l Rules l Copy Data l Journals.96 Viewing Audit Details ............ Forms or Data)...................... Action (such as Add or Modify)................... Add or Modify l Property—Audit properties 95 . You must be a Service Administrator to view and export task audit information...................

You can configure and change the audit option for any task group. click Configure.l Old Value l New Value Configuring Audit Tasks By default. . ä To enable task auditing for a task: 1 On the Home page. By default. 2 On the left. click Auditing 3 From the Audit Information page. select a Task Group and click Apply. click Auditing . the Audit Information page displays all tasks. click Console. audit tracking is always enabled for all task groups. 2 On the left. Auditing will be started for the selected Task Group. 96 . click Console. 4 From the Configure page. Viewing Audit Details ä To view task audit details: 1 On the Home page.

You can scroll to view all the records. where you can enter the member intersection. m m m l l If you select Metadata Administration. the system displays a list of subgroups where you can select sub-tasks for metadata: o All o Custom Dimension o Member o Years o Period o View o Currency o Consolidation o Scenario o Entity o ICP o Account If you select Data Form.click the calendar to select an end date. and follow the download instructions. You can enter the full or partial member intersection and the system can perform a wildcard search based on the criteria that you specify. User . Action . and select filter criteria: l Task Group .3 Optional: Click Filter. 5 Optional: To export the audit information to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. the system displays a list of subgroups where you can select sub-tasks for forms: o All o Form o Form Folder If you select Data.enter a user ID. Default is All. l Start time .000 records from the audit table that match the filter criteria. click Export. or All.select one or more. the Intersection box is displayed. You can enter full or partial user ID information and the system can perform a wildcard search based on the criteria that you specify. or All.select one or more. l End time . Tip: You can select Clear to clear your selections and return to the default values. click Apply. 97 . The grid displays the top 1.click the calendar to select a start date. 4 When you are done selecting filter criteria.

When you select the Export option, the system exports all of the records that match the filter
criteria to a CSV file.

98

6

Defining Valid Intersections

In This Chapter
Understanding Valid Intersections........................................................................99
Creating Valid Intersections ............................................................................. 105
Managing Valid Intersections ........................................................................... 106
Suppressing Invalid Data in Forms ..................................................................... 109
Working with Valid Intersections in Forms ............................................................. 109
Managing Invalid Intersection Reports ................................................................. 111

Understanding Valid Intersections
Subtopics
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l

Valid Intersection Groups
Valid Intersection Rules
Anchor and Nonanchor Dimensions
Valid Intersection Examples
Redundancy or Overlap in Valid Intersection Rules
Shared Members and Valid Intersection Rules
Substitution Variables and Valid Intersection Rules
Evaluation Order

Valid intersections enable you to define rules, called valid intersection rules, which filter certain
cell intersections to users when they enter data or select runtime prompts. For example, you can
specify that certain programs are valid only for some periods or departments.
After valid intersections are defined, cells containing invalid data are read-only. This restriction
speeds the consolidation process and optimizes the information available to users.
To better understand how valid intersections affect behavior in forms and in runtime prompts,
see “Working with Valid Intersections in Forms” on page 109.
You can define valid intersections in the Console. To define valid intersections, you must become
familiar with these valid intersection concepts:
l

Valid intersection groups. See “Valid Intersection Groups” on page 100.

l

Valid intersection rules. See “Valid Intersection Rules” on page 100.

99

l

Anchor and nonanchor dimensions. See “Anchor and Nonanchor Dimensions” on page
100.

Valid Intersection Groups
Valid intersection groups define:
l

Dimensions to be included

l

One of those dimensions as the anchor dimension

l

Whether nonanchor dimensions are required or not

l

Whether the anchor dimension members not specified or referenced will be valid or invalid

Valid Intersection Rules
Valid intersection rules:
l

Must use the same dimensions that were defined within their valid intersection group

l

Define only valid intersections

l

Valid intersection rules within the same valid intersection group that produce an apparent
conflict or overlap, are marked valid if either valid intersection rule condition is met
See “Example: Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules Within the Same Valid
Intersection Group” on page 103.

l

Valid intersection rules in different valid intersection groups that produce an apparent
redundancy or overlap, are marked valid if they satisfy the requirements of all valid
intersection groups
Thus, if any valid intersection group marks an intersection invalid, regardless of other valid
intersection groups making it valid, the system will mark the intersection invalid. Invalid
groups override valid group results.
Note: If you want to remove valid intersections regardless of what other valid intersection

groups allows, then this rule must be in a different valid intersection group.
See “Example: Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules Within the Same
Valid Intersection Group” on page 103.

Anchor and Nonanchor Dimensions
Anchor and nonanchor dimensions:
l

Anchor dimensions are always required dimensions in the type that is used in the valid
intersection evaluation.
See “Example: Required Dimension” on page 102.

l

100

Nonanchor dimensions are either required or not required:

If a nonanchor dimension is required, any type that does not use that dimension will
ignore any valid intersection group where that dimension is tagged as required as it
evaluates the valid intersections.

m

If a nonanchor dimension is not required, any type that does not use that dimension
will still evaluate any valid intersection group that includes that dimension as not
required and evaluate the intersections of any other dimensions in the valid intersection
group in the type.

m

l

Unselected anchor dimension members are valid by default, but you can mark them invalid
by clearing the Unselected Members are Valid option. This option marks all intersections
with anchor dimensions not selected in this rule as invalid.
See “Example: Unselected Members are Valid” on page 103.

Valid Intersection Examples
Subtopics
l
l
l
l
l

Example: Anchor and Nonanchor Dimensions
Example: Required Dimension
Example: Unselected Members are Valid
Example: Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules Within the Same Valid Intersection Group
Example: Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules in Different Valid Intersection Groups

This section provides valid intersection group and valid intersection rule examples to illustrate
a few simple, complex, and edge-case scenarios.

Example: Anchor and Nonanchor Dimensions
The choice of the anchor dimension is critical. Consider the following example, which produces
a different result based on the anchor dimension definition:
l

l

Valid intersection group 1 defines Entity as the anchor dimension and Product as a
nonanchor dimension.
Valid intersection group 2 reverses this definition with Product as the anchor dimension
and Entity as the nonanchor dimension.
Table 15

Example - Anchor Dimension is Entity

Valid Intersection Group

Anchor Dimension - Entity

Nonanchor Dimension - Product

1

DESC(500-Manufacturing) - Unselected members are valid

DESC(P_TP1 - Computer Equipment)

Group 1 means entities that are descendants of Manufacturing are valid only with descendant
products of Computer Equipment. No other products are valid with descendants of
Manufacturing. All other entities besides descendants of Manufacturing are valid with all
products, including descendants of Computer Equipment.

101

Table 16

Example - Anchor Dimension is Product

Valid Intersection Group

Anchor Dimension - Product

Nonanchor Dimension - Entity

2

DESC(P_TP1 - Computer Equipment) - Unselected members are valid

DESC(500-Manufacturing)

Group 2 means products that are descendants of Computer Equipment are only valid with
descendant entities of Manufacturing. No other entities are valid with descendants of Computer
Equipment. All other products besides descendants of Computer Equipment are valid with all
entities, including descendants of Manufacturing.
Caution!

The choice of anchor dimension is significant. You will get dramatically different
results if you choose the wrong anchor dimension.

Example: Required Dimension
In the following example, if a nonanchor dimension is not required, then the system evaluates
all remaining dimension intersections in the valid intersection group for a type that does not
contain the nonrequired dimension. This behavior could result in the evaluation of a valid
intersection group with only one effective dimension.
Table 17

Example - Required and Non-Required Nonanchor Dimensions

Valid Intersection Group

Anchor Dimension - Entity

Nonanchor Dimension - Product

1

DESC(500-Manufacturing) - Unselected members are
valid

DESC(P_TP1 - Computer Equipment) - Not required

In Group 1, the product dimension is not required, and unselected entities are valid. Therefore,
if the type of the form or business rule, at runtime, does not include the product dimension, the
system evaluates the entity dimension selections to mark all entities as valid for a type that doesn’t
contain the product dimension.
Table 18

Example - Required and Non-Required Nonanchor Dimensions

Valid Intersection Group

Anchor Dimension - Entity

Nonanchor Dimension - Product

2

DESC(500-Manufacturing) - Unselected members are
Invalid

DESC(P_TP1 - Computer Equipment) - Not required

In Group 2, the product dimension is not required, and unselected entities are invalid. Therefore,
if a type does not include the product dimension, the system evaluates the entity dimension
selections to mark all entities except descendants of Manufacturing as invalid. Thereafter, any
type that doesn’t use the product dimension will only allow data entry in the descendants of
Manufacturing entities.

102

the anchor dimension unselected members are invalid (this option is cleared).Caution! Carefully consider whether a nonanchor dimension is required or not.No Department 2 IDESC(GP .Sales) Because Group 1 defines all unselected members are invalid.Entity 1 IDESC(BS .Entity 1 IDESC(GP . There is no restriction on inclusive descendants of Gross Profit accounts only being valid for inclusive descendants of Sales Entities. Example: Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules Within the Same Valid Intersection Group When valid intersection rules are within the same valid intersection group and produce any redundancy or overlap.Gross Profit) . In the other group. Rule 1 is a subset of Rule 2. Table 19 Example .Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules Within the Same Valid Intersection Group Valid Intersection Rule Anchor Dimension .Gross Profit) . In one group. the system marks noninclusive descendants of Balance Sheet invalid.Unselected members are invalid 000 . Gross Profit is not an inclusive descendant of Balance Sheet. especially if the result leaves a valid intersection group with only one effective dimension. Example: Unselected Members are Valid In the following example. 103 .Total Department) Because Gross Profit is a descendant of Net Income and Sales is a descendant of Total Department.Unselected members are invalid IDESC(403 . See “Example: Unselected Members are Valid” on page 103. inclusive descendants of Gross Profit are valid with any inclusive Descendant of Total Department.Unselected Members are Valid Valid Intersection Group Anchor Dimension . the anchor dimension unselected members are valid (this option is selected).Account Nonanchor Dimension . the invalid definition from Group 1 overrides any further valid intersections of the same anchor dimension member set. the system marks an intersection valid if either of the valid intersection rule conditions are met. Additionally. selecting the Unselected Members are Valid option for anchor dimension members also plays a significant role in the system behavior for valid intersections. two intersection groups are valid. So even though Group 2 explicitly states inclusive descendants of Gross Profit are valid with inclusive descendants Sales entities.Gross Profit) .Unselected members are valid IDESC(TD .Sales) 2 IDESC(GP .Balance Sheet) . so Rule 1 is effectively a “No operation” rule and is unnecessary.Unselected members are valid IDESC(403 .Account Nonanchor Dimension . Table 20 Example .

Net Income) . Conversely. In the following example. Redundancy or Overlap in Valid Intersection Rules Valid intersection rules within the same intersection group.Required 2 IDESC(NI . application.Unselected members are valid IDESC(TD . Application 3.Entity 1 IDESC(GP . are marked valid if either valid intersection rule condition is met. the system uses the first one it finds as it searches in this order: 1. required and nonrequired nonanchor dimensions.Total Department) .Unselected members are valid IDESC(403 . the system enforces this group for these intersections. there are redundant or overlapping rules in different groups: Table 21 Example . they will be treated as rules of the same valid intersection group. and Unselected Members are Valid attribute. or database level. If different valid intersection groups share the same attributes. Shared Members and Valid Intersection Rules Shared members are supported in valid intersection rules.Account Nonanchor Dimension . non-Gross Profit accounts can still use all inclusive descendants of Total Department entities. Substitution Variables and Valid Intersection Rules You can use substitution variables in valid intersection rules. Substitution variables can be set on the server.Sales) . Database 2.Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules in Different Valid Intersection Groups Valid Intersection Rule Anchor Dimension . Other. which produce any apparent conflict or overlap. but inclusive descendants of Gross Profit accounts must use inclusive descendants of Sales entities. if a shared member is selected for a valid intersection rule. User variables are not supported. The same substitution variable can exist on multiple levels.Gross Profit) . any shared members are also included in the rule. including the anchor dimension.Example: Redundant or Overlapping Valid Intersection Rules in Different Valid Intersection Groups When valid intersection rules are in different valid intersection groups and produce any redundancy or overlap. the base member is also included in the rule. If a base member is selected for a valid intersection rule. the system marks an intersection valid only if it satisfies the requirements of all valid intersection groups.Not required Because Group 1 is further restrictive for inclusive descendants of Gross Profit accounts being valid with inclusive descendants of Sales entities. Server 104 .

and dimension required. To select the range of members to include. b. Click Clear to clear the selection. e. l l l Click Edit to open the Select Members page and select members to include in the valid intersection rule. the system evaluates the first valid intersection group in the list. b. next to Select Anchor d. nonanchor dimensions are not required. f. 105 .Evaluation Order Evaluation order for valid intersection groups orders invalid results sets as quickly as possible. once an intersection is defined as invalid. To make a nonanchor next to the nonanchor dimension. click Console. see “Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order” on page 107. 4 Optional: By default. next to the new rule: click the Down arrow. Optional: By default. a. and so on. To change the order in which groups are evaluated. Click Add Rule. it will stop evaluating the rest of the list because. and then click Unselected members are valid. You can exclude a subset of what is included for that dimension. Click Create. click Add Dimension. or remove in the valid intersection. increasing the speed and efficiency of the overall valid intersection evaluation. click the Down arrow. the anchor dimension members that are not specified in the valid intersection rule are marked valid. 2 On the left. exclude. click Valid Intersections 3 Create the valid intersection group: . Define the valid intersection rule: a. click the Down arrow. Dimension. click Required. To select additional dimension (called nonanchor dimension). Creating Valid Intersections ä To create a valid intersection: 1 On the Home page. To select the anchor dimension. then the second group. next to the anchor dimension. click the Down arrow. For example. Enter a name and description for the valid intersection group. Click Add Exclusion to define an exclusion in the rule. If the system finds an invalid intersection in the second group in the list. To clear this option. it will override other valid intersection rule results. c.

Create a valid intersection group. See “Disabling and Enabling Valid Intersection Groups” on page 107. Disable and enable valid intersection groups. Click Save and Close. The new valid intersection group is added to the end of the valid intersections list. see “Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order” on page 107. . See “Creating Valid Intersections” on page 105. See “Duplicating Valid Intersection Groups” on page 108. Delete valid intersection groups. See “Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order” on page 107.To delete a rule. See “Editing Details for a Valid Intersection Group” on page 107. click Console. click Valid Intersections 3 Perform a task: l l l l l l 106 . Duplicate an existing valid intersection group so that you can quickly create a new one. See “Deleting a Valid Intersection Group” on page 109. Managing Valid Intersections Subtopics l l l l l l Viewing Valid Intersections Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order Disabling and Enabling Valid Intersection Groups Editing Details for a Valid Intersection Group Duplicating Valid Intersection Groups Deleting a Valid Intersection Group Viewing Valid Intersections ä To view valid intersections: 1 On the Home page. To reorder the rules in the list. 2 On the left. Edit details for a valid intersection such as adding or removing dimensions in a valid intersection group. click Delete 5 . Reorder invalid intersection groups.

Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order Evaluation order for valid intersection groups orders invalid results sets as quickly as possible. ä To disable and enable a valid intersection group: 1 On the Home page. 2 On the left. increasing the speed and efficiency of the overall invalid intersection evaluation. When a valid intersection is disabled. . Tip: You can also drag valid intersection groups to move them up and down in the list. click Console. . Editing Details for a Valid Intersection Group To edit valid intersection group details. You can reenable a disabled valid intersection group in the Console. by default. move them up or down in the order. click Valid Intersections 3 In the Enabled column of the valid intersection list. the valid intersection rule for that group no longer applies when viewing forms or business rules. 2 On the left. ä To change the position of a valid intersection group in a list: 1 On the Home page. If they are not. you work with dimension members in the member selector. click Valid Intersections 3 To the right of the valid intersection. see “Evaluation Order” on page 105. 4 Ensure that any remaining groups that are enabled are still listed in the correct evaluation order in the valid intersections list. click the Actions icon. . Note: The check mark is green if the group is enabled. To learn ore about evaluation order. Disabling and Enabling Valid Intersection Groups Valid intersection groups. If you do not want a valid intersection group to be evaluated or used. 107 . 4 Select Move Up or Move Down. You can also define exclusions in valid intersection rules. are enabled at the time of creation. click Console. you can disable it on the Valid Intersections tab in the Console. click the check mark next to the valid intersection group that you are disabling or enabling.

click Console. 108 . exclude. You can also type in the members or functions. You can select members to exclude. then select Duplicate. click Valid Intersections 3 Click the Actions icon. 2 On the left. you can select or include all children of YearTotal except children of Q1 by excluding children of Q1. click the Down arrow. To delete a dimension from a valid intersection group. or remove in the valid intersection rule: m m m l l 4 to select Click Edit to open the Select Members page and select members to include in the valid intersections rule. next to the dimension. Click Add Exclusion to define an exclusion in the rule. 2 On the left. click Console. Click Save and Close. 5 Reorder the valid intersection groups.ä To edit valid intersection group details: 1 On the Home page. 4 Open the valid intersection group and edit it. Duplicating Valid Intersection Groups To speed valid intersection group creation. ä To duplicate a valid intersection group: 1 On the Home page. to the right of a valid intersection group that you want to duplicate. if needed. click Add Rule or Add Dimension. Click Clear to clear the selection. To remove a rule from a valid intersection group. and . for example. l To edit dimension details. you can duplicate an existing valid intersection and then edit it. next to the dimension. See “Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order” on page 107. click Delete . l . and then click Delete . the members to include. click Valid Intersections 3 Click the name of the valid intersection group that you want to edit. To add a dimension or rule to a valid intersection group. click the Down arrow.

a tool tip displays indicating that the cell is read-only because it is defined as a invalid intersection.Columns. click Console. columns. ä To suppress invalid data in forms: 1 On the Home page. ä To delete a valid intersection group: 1 On the Home page. if needed. read-only color coding. The valid intersection group applies first to the form point of view and page axis. the third validation group becomes number two. . If you hover the cursor over an invalid intersection. click Valid Intersections 3 Click the Actions icon. then the form suppresses invalid rows. 109 . to the right of a valid intersection group that you want to remove.Deleting a Valid Intersection Group After a group is deleted. then a warning message is displayed. select Suppress invalid data . or both. 2 Open the form and then click Layout. The affected cells in the form display as read-only following standard. see “Deleting a Valid Intersection Group” on page 109. and the form does not render a data grid until a valid intersection is selected. then the rows and columns are filtered to restrict data entry at invalid intersections. and then To delete a valid intersection rule from a valid intersection group. and the second one in the order is deleted.Rows and/or Suppress invalid data . 2 On the left. . the valid intersection groups are reordered. Suppressing Invalid Data in Forms Suppressing invalid data hides rows or columns in forms that contain invalid data. If the Suppress Invalid Data option for the form is enabled. select Delete. the system displays rows or columns that contain cells with data that are invalid. If this option is not selected. Working with Valid Intersections in Forms Using valid intersections prevents data entry for invalid intersections as defined in the applicable valid intersection group. 4 Reorder the remaining valid intersections. If there are three valid intersection groups. If the point of view intersections are all invalid. Cells with invalid data are read-only. See “Changing the Valid Intersection Group Evaluation Order” on page 107. If the point of view has valid intersections. click Data Analysis. as appropriate. 3 Under Grid Properties.

You can display invalid members in the member selector using the Show Invalid Members option. 110 . when that dimension is selected l Provides the option to hide invalid members from dimension lists or display them as unselectable in the point of view l Provides the ability to reset the point of view to the fully unfiltered list without closing and reopening the form by clearing the selections Note: Ad hoc forms. as appropriate. and applies valid intersection groups with the most recently used as current selections. You can also click the right arrow in the form point of view. Valid intersection groups further restrict the valid intersections of dimension members already granted to a user. which consist of a mix of valid and invalid intersections. In the member selector. which is based on the members that were selected for the other point of view dimensions l Ignores the order in which point of view dimension members are selected because selecting a member from any dimension included in a valid intersection group dynamically filters the remaining dimension member lists for those dimensions included in the valid intersection group. You can also clear a selection. Select members from a point of view dimension l Enables you to select a member on the point of view l In the member selector for a point of view dimension. Note: Valid intersection groups do not grant access to dimension members. Select Go to render a form based on point of view selections. will not filter page or point of view members according to valid intersection groups.Any rows or columns. because valid members must be selected for each dimension. You can reset the point of view to the default. display those intersections as valid or invalid. both in Web and Smart View. Table 22 Form Behavior if Valid Intersections are Applied Action Behavior Open a form The form renders with member selections as defined in the form definition. Invalid members are displayed but are unavailable for selection. as appropriate. read-only shading and preclude data entry. thus opening up more selections for other dimensions. Enter and save data The form data is entered and saved. You cannot render a form with a dimension cleared. The form renders as defined based on the valid point of view intersection. adhering to the user’s access rights for dimensions. Invalid intersections are displayed with standard. unfiltered list without closing and reopening the form by clearing the selections. invalid members are suppressed due to valid intersection rules. enables you to select from a filtered list of remaining valid intersections.

When the report is run. 6 From Cube. Scenario. and then click OK. click Delete 9 next to the dimension. click to select members. click Console. Tip: To remove an optional dimension. . select Consol or Rates. you must be a Service Administrator. click Add Dimension. See these tasks: l “Creating an Invalid Intersection Report” on page 111 l “Editing an Invalid Intersection Report” on page 112 l “Duplicating an Invalid Intersection Report” on page 112 l “Running an Invalid Intersection Report” on page 112 l “Deleting an Invalid Intersection Report” on page 113 Creating an Invalid Intersection Report ä To create an Invalid Intersection report: 1 On the Home page. and click OK. and then click Submit. 5 Enter a report description. 8 Optional: To select a member from another dimension. select a dimension member. and View. it displays the results of your last two scans.Managing Invalid Intersection Reports From the Console. You define the scope of the database that you want to scan for invalid intersections that contain data. 7 For Entity. you can define reports that enable you to identify invalid intersections. click Invalid Intersection Reports 3 Click Create. 4 Enter a name for the report. Save and Run later . The Schedule Job dialog box displays. 111 . Select when to run the job and how often. 2 On the left.to run the report immediately. Select an option: l l Save and Run now .to save the report as a job to be run at a later time. To manage Invalid Intersection reports.

and then select Edit. 5 In the Duplicate dialog box. click Save and Close. click Console. select a report. select a report. 2 On the left. enter search criteria. ä To create an Invalid Intersection report: 1 On the Home page. 3 112 From the list of reports. click Console. and then select Duplicate. description. 5 Optional: Edit the report name or description. 2 On the left. . Tip: To search for a report. click Invalid Intersection Reports 3 From the list of reports.Editing an Invalid Intersection Report You can edit an Invalid Intersection Report and change the name. 6 Optional: Select different report criteria. The Invalid Intersection Reports page displays a list of existing reports. enter a Name for the new report and then click OK. click Console. and then click Search. 4 Click the Actions icon. 4 Click the Actions icon. and report criteria. . . Running an Invalid Intersection Report ä To create an Invalid Intersection report: 1 On the Home page. click Invalid Intersection Reports 3 From the list of reports. click Invalid Intersection Reports . select a report. 2 On the left. 7 To save your changes. Duplicating an Invalid Intersection Report ä To create an Invalid Intersection report: 1 On the Home page.

. click Console. click Invalid Intersection Reports 3 From the list of reports. 4 Click the Actions icon. and then select Run. 113 .4 Click the Actions icon. and then select Delete. Deleting an Invalid Intersection Report ä To create an Invalid Intersection report: 1 On the Home page. 2 On the left. select a report.

114 .

........... 141 Forms are grids for entering data........................................... A User or Viewer can launch the form........................................... you must create simple forms before creating composite forms.................................................................... 115 ............... 140 Working with Smart Lists ............ see Getting Started with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud......................... 129 Working with Forms and Form Components..................................................................... You can create simple forms or composite forms to meet your needs.................... 118 Creating Simple Forms ........................................................ but cannot modify the layout.................................................................. Because composite forms consist of simple forms. See these topics: l “Form Components” on page 117 l “Form Design Considerations” on page 118 For information on form security........................ 136 Running Form Diagnostics ......................... 115 Form Components ................................Managing Forms 7 In This Chapter Predefined Forms .... Note: The forms that are displayed by default may depend on the features that are selected for the application................... the Service Administrator and Power User have Modify access to these forms............................................................................. the system provides these forms................................. 138 Working with Substitution Variables...................... 117 Form Design Considerations ........... Predefined Forms When you create an application........................ By default....................... 139 Working with User Variables ............................................................. 119 Creating Composite Forms ..

translate and consolidate data. Ending Rate Manage exchange rates. Investment in Subs).Override Rate 116 .<selectable> Year . Columns = Periods Scenario . Rows = Entity .<selectable> Columns = To Currency Scenario .<selectable> Year . you can enter either an Override rate or Override amount for the account.<selectable> To Currency You also identify which currency to use as the application currency. The form is prepopulated with currencies. Some Balance Sheet accounts are specified as Historical Rate accounts (for example. Account . by default. Common Stocks.From Currency. You enable the currencies applicable for the application.To Currency <selectable> Override Rates Manage override rates.<selectable> Account .Global Currency . Rows = All accounts specified as Historical Rate accounts Rows = From Currency Columns = Periods Columns = To Currency Scenario .Hierarchy Enter exchange rates for the single period selected in the Point of View.Average Rate.<selectable> Year . the currency rate data is entered in relation to the application currency.<selectable> Entity. Rows = Currencies .Average Rate.<selectable> Year . Ending Rate Enter Exchange Rates . Columns = Periods (all base periods) Scenario .<selectable> Entity. For Historical Rate accounts.From Currency. Account .Multi Period Exchange Rates Enter exchange rates for multiple periods to a single To Currency selected in the Point of View.<selectable> Year.Single Period Columns = Periods Scenario . Rows = All enabled currencies for the application (From Currency). . Rows = Currencies .Table 23 Predefined Forms Form Name Description Dimension Members Data Status View calculation and approval status.<selectable> Period Enter Exchange Rates .

all data entered in pages. Rows = Entities . you can assign Unit Sales to the row axis and January to the column axis. if the Scenario dimension is set to Budget in the Point of View. The Point of View is set to one member. in the Point of View you can specify only relevant members or include user variables. You can specify the number of members in a page dimension that enables a search drop-down list on the data entry page. To simplify the form. which a user cannot change. When users access forms. Each item on the page axis can have members selected from one or more dimensions. and select members using relationship functions or attributes. 117 . rows.Hierarchy Columns = Periods Scenario . Switch between member sets by selecting them from the page axis. Users see only members that they can access. You can specify multiple page drop-down lists.Form Name Description Dimension Members Percentage Consolidation Enter Percent Consolidation values. For example.<selectable> Year . For example. for each Point of View dimension.<selectable> Form Components Subtopics l l l Point of View Page Axis Rows and Columns Point of View Select members for the Point of View to determine the context for pages. they can enter data into the cell where the Unit Sales row intersects with the January column. You can add rows and columns to create asymmetrical combinations of members. By default. forms have one set of rows and columns. more logical views. and columns. Rows and Columns Rows and columns define the grid into which users enter data. Page Axis Use the page axis to specify combinations of members that may span dimensions so users can work with data in smaller. You display member names or aliases on the page axis. which is useful if the dimensions contain many members. rows and columns is entered into the Budget scenario.

Users can select only member to which they have Read or Write access.Form Design Considerations When you create a form. For example. the South attribute. Forms and Access Permissions By assigning access to a form. The Point of View must also be set to the level 0 member to allow data entry. the selected Currency member on forms determines the currency in which values display. its layout and instructions) and input data. select them using a relationship function. Values can be entered into rows or columns that display shared members and are saved to the base members in the database. 118 . the rows and columns on forms that include the Europe entity are displayed as Read-only. For a multicurrency application. Users can edit forms only if they have access to at least one member of each secured dimension. for example. Shared members display in the same format as base members in forms. and users can enter data for the entities in their native currency. no currency conversion occurs for those rows or columns. instead. Forms and Shared Members You cannot select shared members individually. you associate with an cube type. Values can be entered and saved into rows and columns that use attributes. Forms and Currencies For a single-currency application. You can enter data in rows or columns that have Currency or Local as the selected member. If a currency member other than Local is selected. You cannot change the cube type after assigning it. all entities use the currency selected when the application was created. if users have Read-only access to the Europe entity. Users can change data only for members to which they have Write access. data values are converted to the selected currency for that row or columns. you control which users can change its design (for example. which determines the form’s valid members. Forms and Versions Rows and columns with level 0 members allow data entry. and the form is read-only. you could select an alternate functional rollup to include all members under that rollup. Forms and Attributes You can select members by selecting a shared attribute. You can edit form accounts if their source type matches the form’s cube type. For example. When the Currency member Local is selected for rows or columns. Rows or columns set to a parent member are read-only.

Calculating totals for the parent of individually selected children could take several passes. click Forms. 5 Select the Cube associated with the form. . and whether to enable dynamic user variables “Setting Form Precision and Other Options” on page 125 Define access permissions See “Managing Security” in the Getting Started with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud. provide a form name of up to 80 characters. Creating Simple Forms Creating simple forms involves these steps: Table 24 Simple Form Creation Checklist Task See This Topic Set form layout. depending on the number of hierarchy levels. Design formula rows and columns “Adding Formula Rows and Columns” on page 127 ä To create simple forms: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. and an optional description of up to 255 characters. context menu associations. 4 On the Properties tab. 119 . and then select Create simple form.Forms and Calculations To optimize calculations. 3 Click Actions. including: l “Setting Form Layout” on page 120 Adding form rows and columns l “Setting Form Grid Properties” on page 121 Assigning dimensions to columns and rows l “Setting Form Dimension Properties” on page 122 Selecting dimension members for forms l “Setting Display Properties” on page 123 Setting grid properties for the form l “Setting Printing Options” on page 124 Setting dimension properties Adding formula rows and columns Setting display properties for the form Setting printing options for the form Adding and updating validation rules in forms Define page axis and Point of View “Page Axis” on page 117 and “Point of View” on page 117 Set form precision. 6 Optional: Provide instructions for working with the form. select row members using relationships (such as Descendants or Children) instead of selecting children individually.

as necessary. Select display properties. Select a dimension from any axis and drag it to the destination axis to move a dimension form one axis to another. See “Creating Composite Forms” on page 129. When creating or editing forms. Clear this option to set different properties for each column. click Forms. You can also drag dimensions from any area in the grid (row column. 5 Optional: Select a dimension. which are forms that display several simple forms simultaneously. . 7 Select each dimension’s members. (You can have dimensions on multiple axes if you set user variables in the Point of View). Note: Initially.7 Click Next to specify the form layout. columns. or within a row or column. or within a row or column. 8 Select a row header (such as 1 or 2) to set row properties. and then drag it to Rows or Columns. Setting Form Layout When you create forms. and then select Create simple form. or a column header (such as A or B) to set column properties. and all dimensions are in the Point of View. Point of View. 3 Click Actions. 4 Open the form. the Layout tab initially contains one row and one column. or page) to any other area. available when there are two or more columns. You cannot select the same dimension for multiple axes. You can also create composite forms. You can drag dimensions from the Point of View to rows. and then drag it to Rows or Columns. you can add rows and columns to a form. and click Layout. available when there are two or more rows. using the information in this table: Table 25 120 Segment Properties Option Description Apply to all rows Apply settings to all rows. Apply to all columns Apply settings to all columns. When setting row and column layout: l l l l Assign at least one dimension to the row and column axis. Clear this option to set different properties for each row. or to pages. 6 Optional: Select another dimension. . ä To set or update the form layout: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. all dimension are in the form Point of View.

Column width l Default: Use the column width defined at the grid level (under Grid Properties) l Small: Display seven decimal places. l Default: Use the row height defined at the grid level (under Grid Properties) l Medium: Display standard row height. 10 Optional: Add or update data validation rules. Optional: Add formula rows or columns. l Medium: Display 10 decimal places. enabling comparison of old. l Size-to-Fit: Force all columns to fit in the displayed space based on the top data cell value. l Large: Display 13 decimal places. read-only data with new. Then update the form to store global assumptions such as a tax rate. Also test forms whenever you make significant changes to your application. Clear to display rows or columns with “#MISSING” in cells when data is missing. set general row and column properties using the information in this table: Table 26 Form Grid Properties Option Description Suppress missing blocks (Rows only) Improves the performance of the Suppress missing data setting when suppressing many rows. Test forms before and after using this setting to determine whether performance is improved. select Global Assumptions Form. editable data Show separator Creates a bold border before the segment to visually distinguish it. 90% or more. and then click Layout. Setting Form Grid Properties ä To set form grid properties: 1 Open the form. l Custom: Select a custom size in pixels for the row height. The Suppress missing blocks setting can degrade performance if few or no rows are suppressed. for example. Read-only Creates a read-only row or column. Row height Global Assumptions Form 9 To enable transferring global assumptions from a test to a production environment for a simple form. 2 In Grid Properties.Option Description Hide Hides the column or row on the form. Suppress missing data Hides rows or columns without data. 121 . Clear to display rows or columns with “#MISSING” in cells when data is missing. Suppress hierarchy Suppresses indentation Suppress missing data Hides rows or columns without data. l Custom: Select a custom size to display more than 13 decimal places. up to 999 places. l Size-to-Fit: Force all rows to fit in the displayed space.

Clear to display rows or columns that contain cells with data that is invalid. or column to set dimension properties. and Point of View dimensions. 3 Select Dimension Properties: Table 27 122 Form Dimension Properties Property Description Apply to all row dimensions Applies properties to all row dimensions Apply to all column dimensions Applies properties to all column dimensions Apply to all page dimensions Applies properties to all page dimensions Apply to all POV dimensions Applies properties to all Point of View dimensions Member Name Displays the member name Alias Displays the member alias . Setting Form Dimension Properties You can set and edit form dimension display properties. page. Suppress invalid Scenario/Time Periods Hides invalid Scenario/Time Periods. hide the row or column. Click Save to save your work and continue. and permit users to view the member formula. page. select Global Assumptions Form.Option Description Suppress invalid data Hides rows or columns with invalid data. and then click Layout. Cells with invalid data are read-only. or click Finish to save your work and close the form. 2 Click in a Point of View. Default row height l Medium l Size-to-Fit: Force all rows to fit in the displayed space l Custom: Select a custom size in pixels for the row height l Small: Display seven decimal places l Medium: Display 10 decimal places l Large: Display 13 decimal places l Size-to-Fit: Force all columns to fit in the displayed space based on the top data cell value l Custom: Select a custom size to display more than 13 decimal places. ä To set dimension properties: 1 Open the form. row. Then update the form to store global assumptions such as a tax rate. up to 999 places Default column width 3 Global Assumptions Form To enable transferring global assumptions from a test to a production environment for a simple form. column. These properties apply to row. including whether to display the member name or alias in the form.

l View and Scenario dimensions must be assigned to the page or Point of View axis. 123 . ä To set display properties: 1 Open the form. Hide form For example. hid forms that are part of composite forms or are accessed from menus or task lists. Entity. and view members. or Point of View axis. page. You can also enable account-level annotations.4 Property Description Member Formula Displays member formulas Hide dimension Hides the dimension Show consolidation operators Displays consolidation operators Start expanded Available only for dimensions on rows or columns. Enable account annotations This option is only available if the Account dimension is on the row. View and Scenario dimensions cannot be assigned to the column axis. Users can select the currency for displayed cell values in forms. enables custom attributes. Click Save to save your work and continue. and then click Layout. Setting Display Properties You can set and edit options for form display. and then select form options: Option Description Make form read-only Use this option to make the form read-only. View. If this option is not selected. You cannot set this option for composite forms. allow entities to support multiple currencies. entity. l Account. Display missing values as blank Leave form cells empty where data does not exist. empty cells display the text “#MISSING”. Users can add annotations to accounts in forms if they have Write access to the account. such as hiding forms or displaying missing values as blank. choosing this option initially displays the dimension member list expanded Enable custom attributes Available only for dimensions on rows or columns. or click Finish to save your work and close the form. scenario. Allow multiple currencies per entity If the application supports multiple currencies. regardless of base currency. in the Layout tab. and Entity dimensions. Account-level annotations can vary by different combinations of Scenario. l The Entity dimension can be assigned to the row. 2 Select Display Properties. Notes: l The Account dimension must be assigned to a row axis.

Setting Printing Options You can set and edit preferences for printing form information in the Layout tab. display them in PDF files Apply precision Apply form precision settings (desired number of decimal points) to the displayed data in PDF files Show currency codes If the form supports multiple currencies. they are not displayed. ä To set printing options: 1 Open the form. select to display account annotations in PDF files Click Save to save your work and continue. or click Finish to save your work and close the form. Show comments Display text notes associated with cells Format data Apply number format settings from the form to the displayed data Show attribute members If attribute members are selected in the form. display currency codes in the form and in PDF files. depending on access permissions. and then click Layout. before the member associated with it. Enable cell-level document (Default) Enable users to add. 2 Select Printing Options. . Supporting detail for children displays above parents. and the order of siblings is preserved. Whether currency codes display depends on whether currency codes are present on any member in the form. currency codes display in the form regardless of the selection for this check box. and then set preferences for printing form information: Table 28 Form Printing Options Option Description Include supporting detail Include supporting detail as extra rows in PDF files. Specify display format: l Normal Order: Prints supporting detail in the same order as on the Supporting Detail page. Click Save to save your work and continue. Message for forms with no data Enter text to display in form rows for queries without valid rows. To prevent users from using documents in a form. Leave blank to display the default text: There are no valid rows of data for this form. and view documents in cells in the form. edit. Enable Grid Spread Use this option to enable grid spread. after the member it is associated with l Reverse Order: Prints supporting detail in reverse order. Show account annotations 3 124 If account annotations are enabled for the form. If a currency code is present on any member contained in the form. or click Finish to save your work and close the form. If currency codes are not present on members in the form. clear this option.3 Option Description Enable Mass Allocate Users must have the Mass Allocate role to use this option.

Validate only for users with access to this form If the currently logged-in user does not have access to the form. row. 2 Select Validation Rules. then that page is always loaded. you set data precision. provide validation messages to users during data entry. 4 In the form. associate context menus with the form. Validation rules are saved with the form. the Paste Validation Rules menu option is displayed when you right-click another cell. and then click Layout. Label only. they can change the color of cells. validations are run as the currently logged-in user and not as the administrator. Before adding data validation rules. Validate only for cells and pages the user has access to When enabled. Paste Validation Rules Paste the previously copied rules to a new location. Setting Form Precision and Other Options In Other Options. 3 Build and validate the rules. the system figures out which page combinations have potential blocks and runs the validations only for those page combinations. and then validate and save the form. Validate only for pages with existing blocks When enabled. and then select an option: Note: The menu options that display are context-sensitive. ä To include data validation rules in forms: 1 Open the form. Copy Validation Rules Copy the selected rules to be pasted to a new location. or cell. and if you previously selected a menu option. Table 29 Form Validation Rules Options Option Description Add/Edit Validation Rules Add or edit existing rules in the condition builder are of the Data Validation Rule Builder dialog box. 125 . and can change the promotional path for Approval units. you can add and update validation rules to the grid. and depend on whether rules have already been added. When rules are processed. Dynamic Calc and Store. which means the user’s security will be applied to the form members. or Store with one child member. column. If a page combination has any Dynamic Calc. click Next to continue building the form. For example. it is important to consider the function the rule will perform and to plan the rule scope. There are a few exceptions to this.Including Data Validation Rules in Forms In the Layout tab. if you right-click a cell that contains a rule and select Copy Validation Rules. do not execute validations associated with the form when validating the Approval unit. and enable dynamic user variables.

You control data precision by applying minimum and maximum values for different account types.1234 100 2 4 100. and then click Other Options. using the right and left arrows.12345 Any number less than or equal to 5 None 100. you can truncate and round the decimal portion of longer numbers.1234500 100. and March. For example.12345 Any number less than or equal to 3 3 100. For example. select Use Currency member precision setting.33333333333333). if Minimum Precision is set to 2. For example: Table 30 Form Data Precision Examples Value Minimum Precision Maximum Precision Displayed Value 100 0 Any 100 100 3 Any number greater than or equal to 3 or None 100. 4 If you select multiple menus. and if the system spreads the value 100 from Q1 into the months January. Precision settings affect only the display of values.000 100. not their stored values.12345 100. If instead you want the currency member’s precision setting to apply for the form. Specify Minimum values to add zeros to numbers with few decimal places.12345 0 0 100 100.12345 2 4 100. 3 In Context Menus. use the Up and Down arrows to set the order in which they display.123 100. Specify Maximum values to truncate and round the decimal portion of longer numbers.33 when they are not selected. Non-Currency Values. ä To set form precision and other options: 1 Open the form. 126 . they display their more accurate values (for example. which are more accurate. When they are selected. 2 In Precision. 33. and Percentage Values.12345 7 None 100. the precision settings that you select here override the precision set for the currency member. associate menus with the form by selecting them from Available Menus and moving them to Selected Menus.00 Notes: l l By default. 6 Click Save. the month cells display 33. 5 Select Enable Dynamic User Variables to allow dynamic user variables in the form. February. select options to set the number of decimal positions displayed in a cell for Currency Values.

Q4 ä To create asymmetric rows or columns: 1 Open the form. 5 Click the row or column number and specify any of the following displayed in the Segment Properties pane to the right: l Hide hides the row or column l Show separator displays the row or column separator l 6 Display formula on form displays the formula on the form when you click that option in the row or column header For each dimension in Formula Data Type in the right pane. you can create a formula column (column D) that computes the percentage variance between the January sales (column A) and February sales (column B). Formula columns contain formulas that apply to form columns. and then click Layout. and then modify the members selected for this dimension. 2 On the Layout tab. The formula defined for a formula row or column applies to all row or column dimensions. ä To add formula rows and columns: 1 Open the form. 3 Select Add Formula Row or Add Formula Column. for visually separating subtotals and totals within a form. and then enter the formula name. for example. select the appropriate row or column on the Layout tab and then display form building options under Segment Properties. 3 Click the Member Selector to the right of the dimension name. or click Finish to save your work and close the form. Q3. 4 Click Save to save your work and continue. For example: Row/Column A: Scenario = Actual. 2 Click the Dimension Selector to select the dimension to modify. Time Period = Q1 Row/Column B: Scenario = Budget. To define or assign existing formulas to forms. select a data type for the formula result: l Currency 127 . Time Period = Q2. and then click Layout. Blank rows are useful.Creating Asymmetric Rows and Columns Asymmetric rows and columns contain different sets of members selected across the same dimensions. right-click Rows or Columns. For example. Adding Formula Rows and Columns Formula rows contain formulas that apply to form rows. 4 Click the new Formula Label that is displayed in the row or column. Tip: Consider adding a formula row between two other rows to create a blank row.

128 . 5 In Dimension Properties.l Non-Currency l Percentage l SmartList If you select SmartList. Repeat this action for each dimension that you want to move to the Point of View. The Point of View dimensions and members must be valid for the form type and not assigned to a page. select a Smart List from the drop-down list next to the data type. ä To define page axis and Point of View: 1 Open the form. select or clear options for page dimensions. 6 Optional: Click the Dimension Selector and then drag the dimension to the Point of View to add it to the form Point of View. Defining Simple Form Page and Point of View You can select dimensions and members for the page axis and Point of View. 3 Click the Member Selector for each page axis dimension and select members. or click Finish to save your work and close the form. 8 In Dimension Properties. When you set user variables for forms. select or clear options for Point of View dimensions. 2 Click the Dimension Selector and then drag the dimension to Page to add it to the form page axis. 8 Click Validate to ensure that the formula does not contain any errors. Assigning multiple dimensions to the page axis enables users to select dimensionality while entering data. or row axis. column. 9 Click OK to save the formula and to close the Formula window. click the Member Selector for each dimension and then select members. 4 Repeat these steps to assign multiple dimensions to the page axis. The Point of View sets the unique dimension members that define intersections of data. 9 Click Save to save your work and continue. and then click Layout. the variable name displays in the Point of View. Users can select Display Options to specify whether the system sets the page selection to the most recently used selection. and then clicking Edit. 7 In Point of View. l Date l Text 7 Define the formula to use for the row or column by entering the formula name in the Formula field.

such as Total Revenue. one on top of the other. and then click Layout. or click Finish to save your work and close the form. ä To set composite form layout: 1 Open the form. Users can enter data and see results aggregated to an upper-level intersection. 9 Set the composite form Point of View and Page display options. or two sections that are stacked one above the other. 10 Click Save to save your work and continue. or delete simple forms as desired. ä To create composite forms: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. select an option: l Custom Layout to create your own composite form layout. enter a form name of up to 80 characters. 8 Set the composite form section properties. 7 Set the composite form layout. divided by a horizontal line 2-Column Layout to split the composite form into two side-by-side sections divided by a vertical line After you select an option. 2 In Select Layout. the selected layout is displayed. l l 2-Row Layout to split the composite form into two sections. 3 Add. .Creating Composite Forms Composite forms display several forms simultaneously. rearrange. There is also a custom layout option. 6 Optional: Enter instructions for the form. 4 Optional: Click the Down arrow in the upper right side of a section to select the following additional layout options for that section: 129 . and an optional description of up to 255 characters. 5 Optional: Select Hide Form to hide the form. Note: The Custom Layout option is selected by default. 4 In the Properties tab. and then select Create composite form. Initially. Setting Composite Form Layout Each area in the composite form is called a section. you specify whether to divide the composite form layout into two side-by-side sections. click Forms. 3 Click Actions.

In the Form selector dialog box. Expand Section Properties and click the Add icon. the simple forms selected for the composite form display from left to right. and select Add Form. l You can drag simple forms between sections of a composite form. select the Down arrow. and the right section is empty. The simple forms from the split section are included in the left section. For example. l Delete to remove a section from the composite form When you delete a section from a composite form. note the following guidelines: l l Composite forms can contain simple forms and ad-hoc forms. l If you select Group as Tabs.l Split Horizontally to split the section into two sections. During runtime. select a form and click OK. Click Save to save the Composite Form layout. Click in the desired section. where you can select additional forms to add to the layout. When you are adding simple forms to a composite form. unless they are included in other sections of the composite form. l Group as Tabs to display the forms in that section as tabs l Ungroup Tabs to clear Group as Tabs. In the Form Selector dialog box. select a form and click OK. l 5 Add Form to display the Form Selector dialog box. do one of the following steps: l l l Drag a form from the Forms in <Form Folder> pane to the desired section. 130 . Right-click the simple form. if you split a section vertically. the form displays in the order selected. and then from top to bottom within each composite form section. Adding Simple Forms to a Composite Form Layout ä To add a simple form to a section in a composite form. and then select Form Designer and edit the form. the simple forms included in that section are also deleted from the composite form. one above the other l Split Vertically to split the section into two side-by-side sections Note: When you split a composite form section that contains simple forms. the original section is divided into two side-by-side sections. Tip: You can edit a simple form from within a composite form. the simple forms remain in the original section.

you can edit a single form from the Layout tab. expand Section Properties. and click an arrow key. Deleting Simple Forms from a Composite Form ä To delete a simple form from a composite form. 2 Expand Section Properties. and then select Form Designer. ä To set composite form properties: 1 Open the form. You can: l Move the form to the top l Move the form up l Move the form down l Move the form to the bottom Editing Simple Forms from within a Composite Form While editing a composite form. Setting Composite Form Section Properties Each section in a composite form is associated with properties set during creation. 3 Click in a composite form section and set the properties as desired. select a form. l Select the form in Section Properties and click the Delete icon. ä To edit a simple form from a composite form: 1 Within the composite form. and then click Layout. 2 Right-click a simple form. 3 Edit the simple form. You can edit these properties after you create a form. 131 . do one of these steps: l Right-click the form and select Delete.Rearranging Forms in the Layout To rearrange the simple forms in the composite form layout. This option is not available for ad-hoc forms. click the Layout tab. l Uncheck the form in the Form Selector dialog box and click OK.

If Forms per Row is set to a value other than Automatic. If Forms per Column is set to a value other than Automatic. The following options are available for each form selected: Name l Display forms as tabs l Add form l Remove form l Edit from label l Move to top l Move up l Move down l Move to bottom Section name to be displayed at the top of the section in Preview mode and at runtime. then Forms per Column is set to Automatic. this option is not available. Height Width Forms per Row Section height. The default is one form per row. Set scope for all common dimensions as global 132 Sets all the common dimensions across all the sections in the composite form to global and displays a list of the global dimensions in Page and Point of View in the Global Dimensions properties. Select: l Automatic to have the system set the width l % (percentage sign) to set section width to a percentage of the composite form width Select: l Automatic to have the system set the number l Select a number from 1 to 20.Table 31 Composite Form Section Descriptions Option Description Forms Displays the simple forms in the section. then Forms per Row is set to Automatic. Forms per Column Select: l Automatic to have the system set the number l Select a number from 1 to 20. Note: If you have grouped the forms as tabs. The default is one form per column. . Select: l Automatic to have the system set the height l % (percentage sign) to set section height to a percentage of the composite form height Width of the section. this option is not available. Select the Text icon to select a text style and color for the section name. Note: If you have grouped the forms as tabs.

You can specify where common dimensions display in composite forms. Creating Master Composite Forms You can design composite forms that have one master form and multiple simple forms. assume that a user is looking at a new computer line item in a form and wants to see the cash flow impact from this line item. which list the Point of View and Page dimensions common to all the simple forms included in the selected composite form section. you could design a composite form that includes the following forms: l l A master form called “New Computers” that contains the following dimensions and members: m Entity: MA m Scenario: Budget m Currency: Local m Year: No Year m Period: Beginning Balance m Asset Class: Computers m Line Items: Base SP1 A simple form called “Cash Flow Impact” 133 . For example. the selection of members in the master form automatically filters to the members in the simple forms.Setting Composite Form Point of View and Page Dimensions The composite form Point of View and page dimensions specify where within a composite form each Point of View and Page dimension name displays. Common dimension display choices are: m Local displays the dimension name in the simple form heading. In this scenario. When you select a section in a composite form. and the simple forms show only the details that are relevant to the members highlighted in the master form. which list the Point of View and Page dimensions that display in the composite form heading. m Global displays the dimension name in the composite form heading. l Custom Dimensions. Only dimensions that are common to all simple forms in all sections of the composite form and that contain the same members can be designated as Global. Only dimensions that are common to al simple forms in a section and that contain the same members can be displayed in the section heading. the right panel displays: l Global Layout Dimensions. When you do so. m Section displays the section name in the section heading.

time). Base SP1. Design suggestions: l l l Display the top section as a chart and the bottom section as a grid. and then click Layout. The simple form. Include the same ad hoc grid twice. select a chart type: Table 32 134 Chart Types Chart Type Description Bar The length of each bar proportionally represents a value over an independent variable (for example. and Keep Only) on the grid and view the changes in the chart. So. Users can also drill down to the next level by clicking the underlined links or chart areas. 2 Click a composite form section. but turned on its side so that the dependent variable is displayed on the horizontal axis. 3 Select Display as Chart. right-click the master composite form and select Apply Context. ä To embed charts in composite forms: 1 Create or edit the composite form. “New Computers”: Computers. is filtered to show only the data that is relevant for the members highlighted in the master composite form. one to display as a grid and the other to display as a chart. ä To designate a form as a master composite form: 1 Open the form. and then right-click on a form. Pivot To. so that users can see the effect of data they enter in the bottom grid (when saved) as a chart on the top. there can be only one master form across all its sections. “Cash Flow Impact”. Budget. . Horizontal Bar Similar to the regular bar chart. Note: The master composite form applies to the entire composite form. 4 On Chart Properties. Create dashboards. the user highlights the row Computers/Base SP1. and MA.In the master composite form. Embedding Charts in Composite Forms Administrators can design composite forms to display the data in sections as charts. and then select Tag as Master Composite Form. for a composite form. allowing you to switch between them. and then click Layout. Users can then perform ad hoc operations (such as Zoom In. To filter the data in a simple form (or forms) that is relevant to the data in a master composite form. Display as Chart toggles with Display as Grid. 2 Right-click the form.

Pie Each slice of the pie chart proportionally represents a class of data in relation to the whole. display the label above the data point for positive values and below the data point for negative values. for non-bar charts. Area Similar to the Line chart. near the top. or for non-bar charts. but the area between the axis and the line is emphasized with color. This is the default setting. or for non-bar charts. 6 Optional: To set where the chart displays the values that the chart represents (called the Legend). Center: To display the label centered on bar charts or. display the label above the data point for positive values and below the data point for negative values. on Options. display the label above the data point for positive values and below the data point for negative values. display the label at the data point. Inside Max: To display the label on the bar. click Label. then click Legend. display the label below the data point for positive values and below the data point for negative values. Inside Min: To display the label inside on the bar. select one of the following options. and then click OK. click Options. sales of various product lines) over time. Scatter Each point represents the distribution of data for two variables. connected by lines. Max Edge: To display the label on the bar. 5 Click OK. the member names or aliases) are displayed. or for non-bar charts. near the bottom. 135 .Chart Type Description Line Displays data points (for example. l l l l l Outside Max: To display the label above bar charts or. for non-bar charts. select one of the following options and then click OK: 7 l Right: To display the legend to the right of the chart (default setting) l Bottom: To display the legend at the bottom of the chart l Left: To display the legend to the left of the chart l Top: To display the legend at the top of the chart Optional: To set where the chart labels (that is.

you can preview the dimensions that are assigned to the Point of View. Previewing completes regular form design validation checks. any data validation rule changes made after the form was last saved are lost. click Data Analysis. The form opens in edit mode in a new tab. In addition. The form opens in edit mode in a new tab. If you do not save changes to a form. and page axes. Deleting. click Forms. and Renaming Forms Opening Forms ä To open a form for editing: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 Select the tab for the type of form that you want to open. although new data cannot be entered. 3 Click the name of the form. Previewing displays member attributes. 4 Click the name of the form. click Forms. 3 With a form open. and data associated with forms.Working with Forms and Form Components Subtopics l l l l Opening Forms Previewing Forms Editing Forms Moving. ä To open and view a form: 1 On the Home page. alias. data validation rules are saved as part of the form. . and checks for proper evaluation of any data validation rules included in the form. ä To preview a form’s design: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 2 Select the tab for the type of form that you want to open. rows. . columns. Previewing Forms While you are designing forms. Data validation rules must be properly completed before the form can be saved. click Preview. 136 .

then click Edit. Editing Forms l Editing Simple Forms l Editing Composite Forms You can edit the layout. 137 . 3 Take one of these actions: . click the Show Usage icon. Editing Composite Forms ä To edit composite forms: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. and instructions. 5 Save the form to ensure that updates are saved. Click Finish to save your work and close the form. and then click Edit. 4 Select: l Properties to edit the form name. Editing Simple Forms ä To edit simple forms: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Forms. description. members. you can add formula rows or columns to a simple form. including any issues with data validation rules. For example.4 Resolve any issues reported during the design validation checks. l Select the form. and properties of both simple and composite forms. or add forms to a composite form. l 5 . and then click Edit. 3 Select the form. click Forms. l Layout to edit form layout. l Select the form. including any changes to data validation rules. Other Options to edit form precision and to change which context menus are associated with the form.

3 Select the form. Click Finish to save your work and close the form. and then Grids. ä To run grid diagnostics: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Click Tools. and then move them to Selected Forms. 4 5 Select: l Properties to edit the composite form name. and Renaming Forms ä To move. Understanding the performance while opening forms and ad hoc grids helps Service Administrators fine-tune and redesign forms and grids to achieve performance benchmarks.Note: When editing a composite form. 5 Click Run Diagnostics. Deleting. 4 Select a task: l . 138 . Click OK. and then enter the new name. Determine what changes were made to the common dimensions of the included simple forms before saving changes to the composite form. this message may be displayed: “Modifications have been made to one or more included forms. then Diagnostics. Running Form Diagnostics You can use grid diagnostics to view performance of forms and ad hoc grids. 3 Click Run Diagnostics. To move a form. select the forms that you want to analyze. click Forms. . description or instructions. 5 l To delete a form. and rename forms: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Rename. delete. Note: You can move multiple forms simultaneously if they are in the same folder. save the composite form”. if you want to save changes to common dimensions. and then select the destination folder. in Available Forms. click Delete. 4 On Grid Diagnostics. l To rename a form. l Layout to edit form layout and properties. click Move. Moving.

enter a value for the substitution variable. click Variables. 6 For Name. 5 On the Add Substitution Variable page. . you do not need to manually update the month value in the form or the report script. 7 For Value. Deleting Substitution Variables ä To delete substitution variables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Creating and Assigning Values to Substitution Variables ä To create and assign values to substitution variables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 4 Click Actions. 3 Select the Substitution Variables tab. 6 Click Yes. then select Delete. 5 Click Actions. 4 Select the substitution variable to delete. 8 Click OK. then select Add. 3 Select the Substitution Variables tab. select the Application Type. you could set the current month member to the substitution variable CurMnth so that when the month changes. For example. enter the name of the substitution variable.Working with Substitution Variables Subtopics l l l About Substitution Variables Creating and Assigning Values to Substitution Variables Deleting Substitution Variables About Substitution Variables Substitution variables act as global placeholders for information that changes regularly. 139 . . . click Variables.

Before you can associate a user variable with a form. 4 Click Actions. For example. 3. After selecting an initial value. If necessary. 6 For User Variable Name. if you create a user variable called Division for the Entity dimension. enabling users to focus only on certain members. 2. select the dimension for which to create a user variable. 3 Select the User Variables tab. 140 . associate the user variable with the form. You can create any number of user variables for each dimension. 5 In the User Variables window. click Variables. create the appropriate parent-level members in the dimension outline. Instruct users to select a member for the user variable associated with the form. they can change it in the form or in preferences. 4. users can select a member for their own division. Define user variables for each dimension that you want users to be able to filter. helping users focus on certain members. then select Add. When designing the form. enter the name of the user variable. and select user variables for any axis in the form. for Dimension Name. you must create the user variable. such as a department. The typical sequence of steps: 1. . Creating User Variables ä To create user variables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Managing User Variables You can set user variables to limit the number of members displayed on a form.Working with User Variables Subtopics l l l l About User Variables Managing User Variables Creating User Variables Deleting User Variables About User Variables User variables act as filters in forms. they must select a member for User Variable Options in preferences. Before users can open forms that have user variables.

and click OK. 6 Click Yes. m Set how #MISSING cells associated with Smart Lists display in forms. click Variables. Perform these tasks to create and administer Smart Lists: l Define Smart Lists l Associate Smart Lists with members. the value of the user variable changes dynamically based on the context of the form. 5 Click Actions. To create a Smart List. 8 Click OK. 3 Perform one action: l .7 Optional: Select Use Context to allow user variables to be used in the Point of View. With this setting. Users cannot type in cells that contain Smart Lists. click Create. l Select dimensions for which Smart Lists are displayed. You can now associate the user variable with a form. When clicking in cells whose members are associated with a Smart List (as a member property). Smart Lists display in cells as down arrows that expand when users click into the cells. Deleting User Variables ä To delete user variables: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Optionally: m Use Smart List values in member formulas. click Smart Lists. 141 . then select Delete. enter the name. m Synchronize Smart Lists in reporting applications ä To create or work with Smart Lists: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Working with Smart Lists Administrators use Smart Lists to create custom drop-down lists that users access from form cells. . 4 Select the user variable to delete. 3 Select the User Variables tab. users select items from drop-down lists instead of entering data.

click Delete and OK. See “Synchronizing Smart Lists in Reporting Applications” on page 142. Deleting Smart lists also deletes any associated mappings with dimension members and reporting applications. set which one takes precedence. ensure that any new members do not have spaces in the name. 4 Define Smart List properties on Properties: 142 . During synchronization. If a member already exists in a Smart List. . then click OK. and then manually transfer related data. Data cells can display only one Smart List. values from reporting applications in all existing mappings are appended after the last Smart List item in the appropriate Smart list. Note: Smart List names cannot have spaces in them.l l To change a Smart List. select them. If you are synchronizing Smart Lists in a reporting application. click Smart Lists. it is not added again. Adding or Changing Smart List Properties Use the Edit Smart List Properties tab to set Smart List properties ä To set Smart List properties: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Smart Lists. . 5 Click Synchronize. 6 If Smart List items are mapped to more than one dimension. If a Smart List is mapped to two dimensions. create a new Smart List with a new name. 3 Select a Smart List and click Edit. Synchronizing Smart Lists in Reporting Applications You can synchronize Smart Lists to map them to dimensions in reporting applications. ä To synchronize Smart Lists in reporting applications: 1 Refresh the application database. 2 Refresh the reporting application mapping. To delete Smart Lists. select it and click Edit. and then members from the second mapping are inserted. If multiple Smart Lists intersect at cells. l Optional: Click Synchronize to synchronize Smart Lists in reporting application. 3 Click the Navigator icon 4 Under Administer. all members from the first mapping are inserted first.

When the cell is in focus. Form Setting: Displays #MISSING or leaves cells blank. this label displays only if Drop-Down Setting is selected in the next option. l For first items only: enter information into the first row. 143 . Generate a numeric ID for each Smart List entry. the Smart List item that is selected from the drop-down is displayed. 3 Select a Smart List and click Edit. l To delete an item. This selection determines what is displayed in the cell when it is not the focus.Table 33 Smart List Properties Property Description Smart List Enter a unique name containing only alphanumeric and underscore characters (for example: Position) and no special characters or spaces. ä To define Smart List entries: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Smart Lists. define drop-down list items: . Name. or Label #MISSING DropDown Label Enter a label (for example. Otherwise. Notes: l l l #MISSING Form Label l 5 Click Save. 4 On Entries. depending on the Display Missing Values As Blank selection for the form. “No Justification”) to be displayed as an entry in the Smart List whose value is #MISSING. When the cell is not in focus. #MISSING labels determine only the display of cells with #MISSING data. Options: l Automatically Generate ID It displays as the first selection in the Smart List drop-down. Smart List names can be referenced in formula expressions. If you do not select this option. allowing #MISSING as a selection in the form. Adding or Changing Smart List Entries Use the Edit /Add Smart Lists Entries tab to define the selections in the Smart List. click Add and enter the information. Display Order How Smart Lists are sorted in the drop-down list: by ID. Use the Entries tab to define selections on Smart Lists. Spaces and special characters are allowed. 6 Select Entries. select it and click Delete. Label Enter the text to display when the Smart List is selected. Determines how #MISSING values are represented in cells associated with Smart Lists. l To add an item. you can customize Smart List ID values. depending on the Display Missing Values As Blank selection for the form. #MISSING remains the stored value. #MISSING or a blank cell is displayed. Drop-Down Setting: Displays the label set in #MISSING Drop-Down Label.

A custom label. do not select Display Missing Values as Blank. including the display when no data is in the cell. Use these options to control the display of #MISSING when cells are not in focus: Option Guideline Blank When designing forms. l Select Preview. Previewing Smart Lists Preview the defined Smart List on the Preview tab. select Display Missing Values as Blank. When setting Smart List properties. select Form Setting. Customizable only if Automatically Generate ID is not selected on the Properties tab. #MISSING.l To edit an item. or (for cells associated with Smart Lists) a specified value. Items highlighted in red are duplicates. 5 Perform one action: l Click Save. Displaying #MISSING with Smart Lists Administrators set values displayed in Smart Lists and data cells. No Change). select Form Setting. change the information in its row: Table 34 Smart List Entries Entry Property Description ID Unique number that sets the order for the displayed entry. . The tab shows the Smart List as displayed in a drop-down list or a table. Cells can display no value. enter the custom label in the #MISSING Drop-Down Label field (for example. #MISSING When designing forms. such as “No Change” 144 When setting Smart List properties. When setting Smart List properties. Select Drop-Down Setting. Name Unique alphanumeric name containing alphanumeric and underscore characters (for example: Customer_ Feedback) and no special characters or spaces Label Displayed text for the Smart List entry on the drop-down list (for example: Customer Feedback).

. 5 Optional: Enter a journal group description.......... 4 Enter a name for the journal group........... 6 Click Save.. you must be the Service Administrator........... To manage journal groups......... the system validates the group against the list of groups and displays an error message if the group that you specify is invalid................ ä To create journal groups: 1 On the Home page.................................. For information on working with journals........... click Journals...Managing Journals 8 In This Chapter Creating Journal Groups ........... You can add groups............. 146 Creating Journal Groups You can create journal groups to help classify journals by type. 145 .................... 2 On the left........ click Journal Groups............. 145 Managing Journal Periods..... Deleting Journal Groups You can delete a journal group if you are the Service Administrator and if there are no journals associated with the group................ You cannot delete a group if there are any journals associated with it........ You can also load journal groups during a journals load............ or delete existing groups.... see the Working with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud........ When you create a journal and specify a journal group.................. 3 Click Create.. and use the groups to filter journal lists............ 145 Deleting Journal Groups .... edit the description of a group.

and then click Confirm at the confirmation prompt. To delete all journal groups. To post journals. 2 On the left.ä To delete journal groups: 1 On the Home page. 4 Select the periods to open or close. 3 Take one of these actions: l l Select one or more journal groups to delete. You can open and close periods at any time. 2 On the left. or to close them. 5 To open the selected periods. click Journals. click Delete All. see the Working with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud. Note: If the group has any journal references in the application. If there are Approved journals in the period. click Close. By default. the system displays an error message that it cannot delete the group. click Delete Selected. from the Actions drop-down. click Console. select Open. 146 . but you cannot change an opened period to unopened. ä To open or close periods: 1 On the Home page. . You cannot post journals to an unopened or closed period. a warning message is displayed that non-posted journals were found for the period. click Manage Periods 3 For Scenario and Year. If you select to close a period that contains Working or Submitted journals. but you can close it. you must open the time periods for the journals. For information on working with journals. all periods have an initial status of Unopened. select members of the periods that you want to open. you cannot close it. To manage journal periods. you must be the Service Administrator. Managing Journal Periods Before you can work with journals. click Journal Groups. you must open the time periods for each scenario to which you want to post. and then click Confirm at the confirmation prompt.

................... 148 Translating Data............... 154 Consolidation Examples ........ 150 Consolidation and Translation Security Access .................. If the parent’s ownership of the child is less than 100%......... If the data for the child entity and the data for the parent entity are in different currencies...................... Launching consolidation runs the consolidation rules for the specified scenario. the ownership percentage is applied.................... 147 ........................... After you enter or load data into base-level entities. The translation process is run as required to convert data from the child entity currency to the parent entity currency................... The system generates proportion and elimination detail.................................. you run a consolidation for a selected Scenario and Period to aggregate the data throughout the organization...................................................................... You launch the Consolidation process from forms or from data grids................ You can make further adjustments to contribution data through journals..................................... 147 Consolidation Dimension......................... the translation process is not run... the system translates data based on the exchange rate... period............................................. The consolidation process begins................ 154 Consolidation Process Consolidation is the process of gathering data from descendant entities and aggregating the data to parent entities..................................................... and creates contribution data..... 151 Consolidating Data ..... and entity... You must have first loaded or entered data in base entities... 150 Consolidation and Translation Rules .. calculate and adjust data... 153 Viewing Consolidation Progress... the required processes run automatically...................................... You can enter adjustments to data through journals....................................... l l l l The system runs calculation rules for all descendants of the entity............................................... If the child and parent entity use the same currency................... After you select the parent entity into which the dependent entities consolidate.................................Consolidating Data 9 In This Chapter Consolidation Process ................................. 151 Calculation Status .................................

Elimination detail contains any eliminating balances that result during consolidation based on elimination rules. It stores intermediate results during the consolidation process to record how the system adjusted the consolidated members. this member represents input data and non-consolidationrelated business logic (for example. Contribution—The consolidated result of a single entity for a specific Parent Entity. and the total contribution stored in the Entity Consolidation member (only for a parent entity). Entity Total—The summation of data of an entity. and percent consolidation) or parent entity adjustment. It includes entity data. for a specific parent entity during a consolidation of a consolidation tree. and contribution information. Elimination—Intercompany elimination data for a specific Parent/Child entity is generated and stored in this member. member formulas). including both input and adjustment data stored in the Entity Input member. override data. this captures the input data (journals. Proportion detail contains the balances resulting from the execution of consolidation rules. For a Parent entity. The Consolidation dimension enables you to report on the details used to perform the different stages of the consolidation process. The following figure shows the Consolidation dimension with Intercompany eliminations enabled: 148 . adjustment. This is a systemcalculated amount as a result of the consolidation process. This includes the automation of the Proportion data and Elimination data for the Parent/Child entity. It also reflects the results of the percent consolidation on the base values. The amount in this member represents the total of the Contribution from each of its children entities.Consolidation Dimension The Consolidation dimension provides an additional layer to the financial information. l l l l l Entity Consolidation—This is only available for a Parent entity. The Consolidation dimension includes the following members: l Entity Input—For a Base entity. As a dependent entity’s values roll up into its parent during consolidation. the system stores consolidation detail including Proportion and Elimination detail. such as the input value and any related adjustments to the entity’s data. which enables you to view details on input values. There is one Entity Proportion member in the Consolidation dimension for every Parent/Child entity relationship. in addition to the consolidation value from its children. Proportion—The weighted values of the Entity Input member of a single entity. It provides an audit trail of the transactions applied to data during the consolidation process.

Intercompany Eliminations When an application is enabled for Intercompany accounts and contains Intercompany account data. The system then aggregates the Contribution data of all child entities of a Parent entity. The data is stored at the Entity Input member of the Consolidation dimension. The summation of Entity Proportion data and Elimination data is stored in the Contribution member of the Consolidation dimension. If not. The intercompany elimination is done at the first common parent entity. for any Intercompany account. For any intercompany data. and stores the result at the Proportion member of the Consolidation dimension. the value is eliminated and data is stored in the Elimination member of the Consolidation dimension. 149 . the system processes these steps independent of the Parent Entity: Users can enter child entity data through manual input and/or data load and/or adjustments in the entity’s functional currency. The status of the parent entity changes to OK.Note: * Entity Consolidation member is a dynamic calculated member and is only applicable to the Parent entity. The system then processes the translated data by applying the percent consolidation (PCON) as related to its parent. the system processes these steps dependent on the Parent Entity: l l l l l The system first translates the Entity Total data (including both Entity Input and Entity Consolidation (applicable only to parent entity) to the currency of its parent. If you want to view the detail of the elimination in the individual partner in the Plug account. eliminations take place as part of the consolidation process. The Plug Target account can be an Intercompany account or non-Intercompany account. the system moves the amount from the Intercompany account to the Plug Target account. Next. The system stores the consolidated result at the Parent entity’s Entity Consolidation member. During consolidation. the system runs the default calculation rules to fully calculate the Entity Input member and change the status to OK. Data Flow in the Consolidation Dimension First. then the Plug account should be set as an Intercompany account. This member is calculated by the sum of all children’s contribution. During the intercompany elimination process. all elimination details for each partner are stored in the “No Intercompany” member of the Intercompany Dimension.

For example. either during the consolidation process or separately. currency translation occurs if the parent entity has a different default currency than the child entities. the translated currency dimension is stored. 7 When the translation process successfully completes.Translating Data Currency translation converts account data from one currency to another. 6 From the Translate menu. 5 From the Actions drop-down menu. the system provides pre-built scripts and member formulas for some of the standard calculation processes. click Launch. 2 From the Forms list. Click OK. select Translate. 3 Select the point of view. You can translate data from the entity’s input currency to any other currency that has been defined in the application. Consolidation and Translation Rules Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud provides pre-built calculation scripts to handle consolidation and translation. After the translation rule is run. 4 Select a cell for which to run translation rules. click Data Analysis. You can make adjustments to the translated amounts in each currency through journals. ä To translate data: 1 On the Home page. When you consolidate data. In addition. click Data Status. these rules are provided by default: l Consolidate l Force Consolidate l Translate l Force Translate l DataLoad_PreProcess_Consol l DataLoad_PostProcess_Consol l MetadataLoad_PostProcess_Consol l FCCSFormStatusProcessor l RefreshDatabase_PostProcess_Consol l RefreshDatabase_DelegatePostProcess l ComputeRates l RefreshDatabase_PostProcess_Rates 150 . the system displays a confirmation message.

none of the data for the specified dimensions has changed. Note: Entities that are locked are excluded from the consolidation process.Consolidation and Translation Security Access The following security access is required to consolidate or translate data: l You must be either an Administrator or Power User. The calculation status can change as a result of several actions: l Changing the organization structure l Adding or deleting accounts l Modifying entity attributes l Entering data in data grids. The calculation status indicates whether data needs to be translated or consolidated. When you assign a user Launch access to the Consolidate Business Rule. or loading data from external sources l Posting or unposting journals l Reloading rules l Changing percent consolidation l Changing currency rates l Changing override amount data Table 35 Consolidation Statuses Status Description OK Data is OK . l You must also have Write access to the Parent entity selected to be consolidated or translated. This occurs when a change to a base entity data impacts a parent entity. Note: Administrators have default access to all the rules in the application. you assign access to the Consolidate and Translate actions by assigning users access to the appropriate rule. Entity and Parent entity combination. No Data No data exists for the specified dimensions. Period. the user also has access to the Translate action menu. When you assign a user Launch access to the Translate Business Rule. Calculation Status Oracle Financial Consolidation Close Cloud maintains the calculation status for each Scenario. which requires a reconsolidation to change its status to OK. As an Administrator. Needs Translation The selected dimension member is not the entity’s default currency and its translated values may not be current. 151 . the user also has access to the Consolidate action menu. Impacted Data has changed since last generated.

Translation is required by user. You can view the calculation status in forms and grids and then take action as necessary. None Impacted A parent entity has been impacted by a change to a child entity. Parent entity needs consolidation first to generate the Entity Consolidation data and then translate.Parent Entity Status Description Action OK None of the data has changed. The system will first consolidate and then translate. None OK None of the data has changed. 2. None Needs Translation Data needs to be translated because it has never been translated or data has changed since the last translation. or the currency rate has changed. Table 36 Entity Input/ Entity Currency . None Table 37 Entity Consolidation / Entity Currency .Base Entity Status Description Action No Data No data has been generated from Consolidation. None 152 . The following tables list available actions for forms and grids. The system will first consolidate and then translate. Translate Table 39 Entity Consolidation/ Reporting Currency . 1. Consolidate Table 38 Entity Input/ Reporting Currency .Base Entity Status Description Action OK None of the data has changed. Table 40 Proportion or Elimination / Parent Currency . a new rules file or metadata file has been loaded. 3. Consolidate OK Data is OK. Parent entity data is OK so only need to translate. 3. 2. and data has been translated. None Needs Translation Data needs to be translated for the following reasons: Translate 1.Base Entity Status Description Action No Data No data has been entered or generated. Parent entity needs to reconsolidate first because child data has changed and then translate.Parent Entity Status Description Action OK Consolidation has been done.Status Description System Change A change has occurred that may affect the data for the specified dimensions. For example.

5 From the Actions drop-down menu. which requires reconsolidation to change its status to OK. 2. Click OK. 6 From the Consolidate menu. Consolidate Table 41 Proportion or Elimination / Reporting Currency . but translation has not been run. Consolidating Data You can launch the Consolidation or Translation process from a form. 3 Select the point of view. click Data Analysis. click Data Status. you select the cells/rows to consolidate or translate. 7 When the consolidation process successfully completes. 153 . The data in the grid is based on the Scenario/Entity/Period/Entity/Currency information from the form.Status Description Action Impacted Data has changed since last generated. and periods in the columns. None Need Translation Data needs to be translated for the following reasons: 1. When the consolidation process is complete. Proportion data has been generated and is OK. In the status grid. 2. When you select a parent to consolidate. select Consolidate. which contains entities in the rows. 2 From the Forms list. the data for the prior period is also consolidated. click Launch. all descendants of the parent are also consolidated. Translate OK Proportion and Elimination data has been generated from Consolidation and data has also been translated. If you consolidate data for a period and the data for prior periods has not been consolidated. Proportion data needs to be re-generated before translation.Base Entity Status Description Action No Data No data has been generated from Consolidate and no translation has been done. Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud provides a predefined Data Status grid. the system displays a confirmation message. 4 Select a cell for which to run consolidation. The system will translate only the Proportion data. the status of each successfully consolidated entity changes to OK. The system will reconsolidate and then translate data. 1. and you can view the data status in a grid. ä To consolidate data: 1 On the Home page.

including the completion status. and Lock status in the column for each period. Example 3: Consolidating Data for Multiple Periods In the Data Status Grid. you can monitor the status of the task from the Jobs console.Viewing Consolidation Progress When you consolidate data. ä To view consolidation progress: 1 On the Home page. consolidation is launched for the following periods: l 154 Consolidate first period (January) . Consolidation Examples Subtopics l l l Example 1: Reconsolidating Data from a Form Example 2: Consolidating Data from the Data Status Grid Example 3: Consolidating Data for Multiple Periods Example 1: Reconsolidating Data from a Form In this example. date and time. Consolidation is launched for the top parent or the intermediate parent from the grid. You can view pending jobs. click Jobs 3 Review Pending Jobs and Recent Activity to check the status of the consolidation. . Consolidation is launched from a form. after first reviewing the status grid and selecting the impacted parent entity for consolidation. However. data has been loaded or entered in base entities and parent entities have also been consolidated. Approval status. subsequently there has been a change to the base entity data which causes an IMPACTED status at the parent entity. 2 On the left. Reconsolidating the top-level parent entity consolidates all parent entities below. Example 2: Consolidating Data from the Data Status Grid The Data Status grid contains all entities in the rows and periods in the columns. l l Reconsolidating at the intermediate parent entity only impacts the upper-level parent entities. After consolidation. the status changes to OK. or recent activity. click Console. 4 Click the name of the job to view Job Details. It displays Calculation status.

l Consolidate last period (December) l Consolidate intermediate period (April) l Consolidate April when the January to February calculation status is OK. but March is impacted. 155 .

156 .

....................................... Task Types—Identify and categorize tasks commonly performed during a close period........ Event Monitoring Task Templates—Tasks that are repeatable over close periods..... answer questions...... such as settings that need to be input by the user... 169 Managing Alert Types ...... and reject tasks..... and can access tasks from email notifications or by logging on to the application..... 157 Close Process Overview ...... System-Automated Task................ and is the alignment of a template's generic close days to calendar dates.... 159 Managing Close Manager System Settings. 176 Close Manager Terms l l l l l l l l Tasks—A unit of action in the application..................... data entry or data consolidation..... Power users define the tasks that comprise a close process........... Execution Types—End-users....... and questions or instructions that are shared by all tasks of that type........ Data Entry........... The Task Type enables you to set default information................... submit.......................... reassign........................................... approve.10 Setting Up the Close Process In This Chapter Close Manager Terms........... Task Types are often based on Integration Types.... Schedules—Defines the chronologically ordered set of tasks that must be executed for a specific close period........ Integration Types—A definition of a service provided by an application....... Dashboard—This view presents a portal-style interface with views into schedules and task lists..... for example............................................................... or G/L Extract. such as hardware or software issues.......... 158 Sample Task Flows......... Administrators can create templates for different types of close periods....................... Users can read task instructions... 157 .......................................... Alerts—Notifications from users on issues that they encounter during the process.... such as monthly or quarterly.. for example........... and high-level summaries into which you can drill down for greater detail........ Users create alerts identifying a problem and assign them to be resolved.......................... 160 Managing Close Process Attributes ....

l Set up holiday rules. 9. 3. The administrator completes the required setup procedures: l l Set up organizational units. When users complete tasks. During the close process. The administrator reviews the tasks required for a close process and sets up Task Types to ensure consistency across tasks and to leverage predefined product integrations. The administrator sets up users. 11. Set up global integration tokens.Close Process Overview The closing process require these steps: 1. users can log on to review and access assigned tasks in different types of views. that they encounter during the close process. Because many tasks are repeatable over close periods. See “Managing Global Integration Tokens” on page 160. an administrator can set up a monthly or quarterly close once and then use it for all months or quarters. The generic tasks in the template are applied to calendar dates. See “Managing Close Process Organizational Units” on page 162. l Set up attachment size. See the Getting Started with Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud. The administrator can also modify the schedule if needed and monitor it throughout the close cycle. 158 . and Approvers. Alternatively. such as hardware or software issues. the administrator saves a set of tasks as a template to use for future periods. 4. “Managing Task Templates”. “Managing Close Schedules”. Alerts are forwarded to Assignees and Approvers for resolution. administrators generate a schedule (a chronological set of tasks) by selecting a template and assigning calendar dates. the administrator changes the schedule status from Pending to Open. See “Maximum Task Attachment Size” on page 168. l Enable email notifications. “Managing Task Types”. Tasks are defined with task predecessors. 5. To initiate the close process for a period. See Chapter 12. For example. 6. 2. Assignees. users receive email notifications of assigned tasks and can click links in the email for direct access to assigned tasks. See Chapter 11. See Chapter 14. Users can create alerts for issues. 10. 7. See “Setting Up Email for Approvals and Notifications” on page 277. See “Managing Holiday Rules for Close Calendars” on page 165. the tasks are sent to approvers and can be viewed by other users. 8. To begin the close process.

Sample Task Flows Scenario 1: Power User The Power User sets up a template and tasks for an upcoming close period. l l l The Power User logs on and opens the Manage Templates page. and creates a schedule from the quarterly template. and the system runs the next task if it is ready. The Approver can reject a task instead of approving it. The Power User selects the calendar dates on which to line up the template tasks. The Task Actions page is launched outlining the process. From the email. 159 . which begins the close process. l The Power User then adds a task to the template specifically for Quarter 2. and the task is reassigned to the Assignee. The Corporate Quarterly Close template contains many of the tasks required for the corporation quarterly close cycle. l The user drills down to see the details of incomplete tasks. The Approver enters additional comments and approves the submission. l The Power User opens the schedule. If another level of approval is required. l The Power User logs on and checks the status of activities through Day 3. l l l l l l l The assigned Approver receives an email notification of an outstanding task––Review MD&A Input for Services submission. then the task completes. l The Power User reviews open tasks for comments or attachments provided by assigned users. the Approver selects the link for Review MD&A Input for Services Submission. l The user logs on and reviews their tasks. Scenario 4: User A user logs on to the application and reviews and completes an assigned task. If the task was the last requiring approval. From the list of templates. Scenario 2: Power User The Power User monitors the status of close activities through the Dashboard. Scenario 3: Approver A user assigned as an Approver reviews a current task to determine whether it can be approved. the task is forwarded to the next approver. the Power User selects the Quarterly Close template and reviews it. The Approver reviews the document that the user submitted when completing the task to ensure completeness.

the following is an excerpt of the parameters: …$YearName$%22%22Period%20Name%22&val6=%22$PeriodName$%22&col17=%22Logical%20Schedules %22.MD&A input. l The user reviews the instructions for the task and selects the Go to Task link.%22Year%20Name%22&val7=%22$Y earName$%22&col8=%22Logical%20Schedules %22. enters a comment about the task. including launching OBIEE reports which require provision of parameters in order to display filtered report content. Scenario 5: User A user responds to an email notification of a task to load data. and a reference document. the parameters are replaced with the appropriate values. l The user enters a comment about the task and submits it for approval.l The user clicks the link for an assigned task . l l The user receives an email notification of an outstanding task––Load Salary Data. l The user loads data into the system. the user selects the link for the page where the required process is documented. clicks a link in the email. and submits it for approval. For example. l l The user reviews the instructions and the reference document. processes the updates. the parameters are inserted into the URL. Managing Close Manager System Settings Subtopics l l l l Managing Global Integration Tokens Managing Close Process Organizational Units Managing Holiday Rules for Close Calendars Changing Configuration Settings Managing Global Integration Tokens The Global Integration Tokens feature enables creation of parameterized URLs. The URLs can be used for a variety of purposes. l The task page is launched with instructions for the task. From the email.%22Deployment%20Name%22&val8=%22$ ScheduleName $%22 where $YearName$ = 2012 $PeriodName$ = Jan12 $ScheduleName$ = DemoSchedule 160 . When the URL is clicked. When creating the URL. The system automatically updates the task status and sends a notification to the assigned approver. and then completes the task.

Task Actions: Viewers of Task Actions can click the reference URLs. and the following native attributes assigned to Tasks. the URL is clickable on the Instruction tab. . select System Settings. click Close Manager.The URL becomes: …%222012%22%22Period%20Name%22&val6=%22Jan2012%22&col7=%22Logical%20Schedules%22. 161 . the URL is clickable in Instructions. 3 Under Manage. Templates. and Schedules: l Period Name l Schedule Name l Task Name l Task ID l Year Name You can access URLs from the following locations: l l l l l Templates: After an administrator or power user adds a reference URL to a template in the Instructions section. the URL is clickable in Instructions.%22Schedule%20Name%22&val8= %22DemoSchedule%22 Parameters can be configured from static parameters defined in your application. Schedule: After an administrator or power user adds a reference URL to a schedule in the Instructions section. Task Details: After an administrator or power user or task owner adds a reference URL to a task in the Instructions section. a warning is displayed: “Deleting a Global Integration Token will invalidate the URLs that are referencing it. When you try to delete.%22Year %20Name%22&val7=%222012%22&col8=%22Logical%20Schedules%22. Are you sure you want to continue?” Creating a Token ä To create a token: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Task Types: After an administrator adds a reference URL to a Task Type in the Instructions section. the URL is clickable on the Instruction tab. attributes of type Text and List. Tokens Global Integration Tokens: l Must be unique l Cannot be modified l Should not be deleted. select Global Integration Tokens. In System Settings.

Deleting a Token ä To delete a token: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Managing Close Process Organizational Units Subtopics l l l Adding Organizational Units Importing Organizational Units Selecting an Organizational Unit Organizational Units allow administrators to model regions. or any other entity that might be affiliated with a task. select the value that is passed when the URL is rendered. A warning message is displayed: “Deleting a Global Integration Token will invalidate the URLs that are referencing it. In System Settings. The section that displays the hierarchy enables administrators to expand and collapse sections of the hierarchy. 3 Under Manage. select Global Integration Tokens. departments. and then Add.4 Select Actions. business units. divisions. enter the value that is passed when the URL is rendered. then select Actions. Are you sure you want to continue?” 5 Click Yes to delete. click Close Manager. . and then Delete. . Adding Organizational Units ä To add an organization: 1 162 Click the Navigator icon . select System Settings. 5 Enter: l Name: A unique token name l Type: Static or Task Attribute l Token Value: m m If Task Attribute is selected as the Parameter Type. If Static Attribute is selected as the Parameter Type. 4 Select a token. entities. Organizational units are hierarchical to facilitate reporting.

l Organizational Unit ID A unique ID used to identify the transaction for Migration purposes. 5 On the Properties tab. In Search Results. Importing Organizational Units ä To import organizational units: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.. Organizational Unit ID cannot be changed after an organizational unit is set. . l Holiday Rule Determines which list of holidays applies to the organizational unit. l Optional: Description l Time Zone Determines which time zone applies to the organizational unit. b. If a time zone is not selected. To select a user: a. rather than having to assign it to each task. Groups. enter: l Name Administrators can change the name. the task time zone will revert to the user’s time zone. In System Settings. or click Select Users. In System Settings. 4 Click Actions. and it need not be unique. 3 Under Manage. select Organizational Units. 3 Under Manage. enter the First Name and Last Name. Select Actions. select System Settings.2 Under Administer. select System Settings. or Teams and add them to the Available column. c. click Close Manager. In Select Viewers. Selection of a time zone is optional. l Parent Organizational Unit Enables Administrators to change the hierarchy. and then Add. 163 . select Organizational Units. and then Add. select the Users. 6 The Access tab enables Administrators to assign viewer and commentator access in a centralized location. Selection of a Holiday Rule is optional. l Work Days Determines which days of the week are work days. click Close Manager.

"". This option is useful when you want to replace a unit in one system with an updated definition from another system."ET (UTC-05:00)"."" l For Import Type. 164 . An arrow indicates a child organization exists."Workdays". 3 Click OK. select System Systems."Description". Expand the parent to select a child organization. "TimeZone". click one: m m 5 Replace—Replaces the Organizational Unit detail with the Organizational Unit that is in the file that you are importing."H olidayRule"."fm_user5"."ParentOrganization"."Americas". Replace All—Imports a new set of Organizational Units that replaces the existing Units. Selecting an Organizational Unit Administrators define organizational units in system settings."Commentator1" "US2". and a viewer named fm_user5."Import Organization US2 Example".2-3-5."Viewer1". The organizational list is displayed in functional dialogs. and then Import l . Sample Organizational import format: Note: This import organizational unit example requires a pre-existing parent org unit named `Americas'. and then click Search. ä To select an organization: 1 Under Manage. a holiday rule named `US'.4 Select Actions. Click Import."Name"."Calendar". "US2"."US". 2 Select an organization. It does not affect other units that are not specified in the import file. Organizational Units that are not specified in the import file are deleted. Create these or edit the file accordingly to use other objects "OrganizationalUnitID". Enter the file name or click Browse to navigate to the CSV import file.

Managing Holiday Rules for Close Calendars Subtopics l l l l l Creating Holiday Rules Importing Holiday Dates Editing Holiday Rules Deleting Holiday Rules Duplicating Holiday Rules Holiday Rules are collections of holiday dates. The Manage Holiday Rules dialog enables Administrators to manage holiday rules. ) to import the list of holidays or click Importing Holiday Dates You can import dates into a holiday rule. ä To import holiday dates: 1 Click the Navigator icon . 3 Under Manage. select System Settings. 6 To name a holiday. In System Settings. click Close Manager. Users need not select a value for this attribute. 4 Click Actions. and then New. then the table should be filtered to display the dates associated with the selected year. 5 Enter: l . l Year The Year attribute behaves as a filter option. select Holiday Rules. Holiday Rule ID Holiday Rule ID is mandatory and must be unique. Uniqueness is not required. in the Holiday section. 165 . If they do. l Name The name of the holiday rule is mandatory and can be up to 50 characters. click Import ( Add and enter the date and name of the holiday. Creating Holiday Rules ä To create holiday rules: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.

select Holiday Rules."Memorial Day" l For Import Type. 4 Select a rule. select System Settings. In System Settings. the date format is set to the locale date format of the exported file location. Editing Holiday Rules ä To edit holiday rules: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Replace All—Imports a new set of holiday dates that replaces the existing holiday dates. Enter the file name. By default. Example of a holiday date import format: "Date". 2016". In System Settings. 5 Edit: l . 166 . Does not affect other units that are not specified in the import file. 3 Under Manage."Name" "Jan 1. click Close Manager. select Holiday Rules. 4 Create or select a holiday rule. For example: 7 l MM/dd/yyyy l dd/MM/yyyy l dd-MMM-yy l MMM d."New Years Day" "May 30. Date formats are not translated. click one: m m 6 Replace—Replaces the holiday dates with the holiday dates in the file that you are importing. select System Settings. 3 Under Manage. select Actions. or click Browse to navigate to the CSV import file. 2016". Holiday dates that are not specified in the import file are deleted. 5 On the bottom section of Holiday Rules. and then Import l . yyyy Click Import.2 Under Administer. click Close Manager. Use this option to replace unit in one system with an updated definition from another system. Holiday Rule ID Holiday Rule ID is mandatory and must be unique. Date Format Select a Date Format from the drop-down list of allowed date formats.

5 Edit the rule as needed. 3 Under Manage. select Holiday Rules. Duplicating Holiday Rules ä To duplicate holiday rules: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. In System Settings.l Name Can be up to 50 characters. select System Settings. click Close Manager. and then Duplicate. select Actions. Users need not select a value for this attribute. Deleting Holiday Rules ä To delete holiday rules: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 4 Select a rule. then the table should be filtered to display the dates associated with the selected year. . 167 . You cannot delete a holiday rule associated with an organizational unit that is not logically deleted. and then Delete. If they do. 4 Select a rule. then select Actions. Changing Configuration Settings Subtopics l l l Approver Levels Maximum Task Attachment Size User Sync Process Approver Levels Approver levels determine the number of task reviews. . In System Settings. select System Settings. l Year The Year attribute behaves as a filter option. select Holiday Rules. click Close Manager. 3 Under Manage. Uniqueness is not required. A list of organizational units to which the holiday rule was assigned is displayed.

. for User Sync Process. and then click Save. First Name. and then User Sync Process. group. . 4 In Approver Levels. click System Settings. click Close Manager. for User Sync Process. select Configuration Settings. select Configuration Settings. Maximum Task Attachment Size Task Attachment Size determines the maximum attachment file that users can upload. In System Settings. select a value from 5 MB. and team details for various reasons. 3 Under Manage. 4 Do one of these tasks: l l 168 . click Close Manager. ä To enable the User Sync Process: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. select Turn On. with incremental values of 5 MB. Last Name. This setting helps administrators adapt to work within limitations of the environment in which the application is installed. and then Approver Levels. then click Save.ä To change the approver level: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. User ID. To initialize to run daily at 5:30 AM server time. 4 In Select maximum file upload size. 3 Under Manage. select Turn Off. 3 Under Manage. User Login. User Sync Process The system maintains a local copy of the user. select System Settings. select System Settings. and then Maximum Attachment Size. then select Turn On. The User Sync process must be initialized manually and then runs daily at 5:30 AM server time. In System Settings. You can change the current maximum file size: ä To change the maximum task attachment size: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Close Manager. select Configuration Settings. . for example. To manually initiate a user sync. up to 100 MB. In System Settings. select a value from 1 to 10.

Managing Close Process Attributes
Subtopics
l
l
l
l
l
l
l

Defining Attributes
Importing List Attributes
Editing Attributes
Duplicating Attributes
Deleting Attributes
Viewing Attributes
Searching for Attributes

Attributes are user-defined fields defined centrally by administrators and used in many places.
You can specify different value types for attributes: Date, Date and Time, List, Number, Text,
and True or False. For example, you can define a custom attribute named Auto Submit with a
value type of Yes or No. When you assign the Auto Submit attribute to an item, you can set it
to Yes for tasks required by external users.
If you select the List type, you can define a pick list of values. For example, you can define a List
attribute named Sales Region, with North, South, East, and West as values.
You can create, edit, and delete attributes.

Defining Attributes
ä To create an attribute:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Under Manage, select Attributes.

4

Click New and enter:
l

Name

l

Attribute Type:
m

Date

m

Date and Time

m

Integer

m

List:

.

If you select List, enter a list of valid responses to the question.
m

Multi-Line Text
The maximum length should be less than 4,000 characters.

169

Select Multi-Line Text, then enter the Number of Lines, from 3 to 50 lines. Multi-Line
Text determines how many lines of text are visible, without scrolling, on the Actions
dialog boxes.
For Multi-Line text type: Select Include Attachments if you want the custom attribute
to include an attachments section on the Actions dialog box.
m

Number:
If you select Number, select number formatting options
o

o

o

o

o

l

For Decimal Places, enter a value for the number of decimal places to display.
Select the Thousands Separator option if you want numbers to display a
thousands separator (for example, 1,000.00)
From the Currency Symbol list, select a currency symbol, for example, Dollars
($).
From the Negative Number list, select how to display negative numbers, for
example, (123).
From the Scale list, select a scale value for numbers, for example, 1000.

m

Text

m

True or False

m

User

m

Yes or No

Calculation
Calculated attributes are read-only. Calculations can only be evaluated against
Schedules:

l

l

Schedules: You can add any Calculation and the calculation is evaluated, regardless of
whether it was explicitly assigned to the task or not.
Templates: You cannot add a custom attribute, that has the Calculation option selected,
as a column or a filterable attribute.
Administrators can add attributes to the attributes sections in the Actions dialogs and
they will be viewable by workflow users. Administrators can restrict access to certain
roles by setting access to Do Not Display. For example for calculated attribute XYZ, an
administrator could add Viewer: Do Not Display access to it, so that XYZ wouldn't
appear for viewers.
Any user role can add calculated attributes as columns in views and portlets. They can
also be added as filterable attributes in the Filter Panel.
When you select Calculation, a Calculation definition section is displayed:
m

Calculation Type: The list of values is determined by the attribute type:
o

o

170

Assign Value to List—Assign custom values to a List type attribute
Assign List To Value—Assign custom list values to the values of a different
attribute.

Conditional—A conditional calculation (If – Then – Else)

o

Scripted—A free-form scripted calculation. Scripted is available for attributes
of type Integer, Multi-line Text, Number, or Text.

o

The following table lists the calculation types that each attribute type can use when
the Calculation option is chosen:
Attribute Type

Assign Value to List

Conditional

Scripted

X

X

X

Assign List to Value

Date
Date/Time
Integer
List

X

X

Multi-Line Text

X

X

X

Number

X

X

X

Text

X

X

X

True/False

X

User
Yes/No
m

X

When you select Scripted Calculation type, to enter a free-form calculation equation,
use the Add Attribute and Add Function:
Add Attribute—Select an attribute and insert the attribute into the Calculation
Definition box at the location of the cursor. If the cursor is in the middle of a word
or attribute, the word/attribute will be replaced in the definition. Any attribute that
is added will have brackets {} around the name, according to the scripting format.

m

Add Function—Select a function and add the function to the Calculation Definition.
The Function is added with placeholders for each parameter.
For example: Insert the DATE_DIFF function in the calculation definition:
DATE_DIFF(<Date1>, <Date2>, <Type>)
Then replace the placeholders with attributes:
DATE_DIFF( {Start Date}, {End Date}, 'DAYS')
Other scripted function examples:
o

Date Difference: Returns the difference in days, hours minutes, or seconds
between two dates. For DATE 1 and DATE 2, the values TODAY and NOW can
be used, which denote the current date (with no time component) and datetime, respectively.
DATE_DIFF(<Date1>, <Date2>, <Type>)
171

Example: DATE_DIFF( {Start Date}, 'TODAY', 'DAYS')
o

Extract Text: Returns the substring within the value, from the positions
specified.
SUBSTRING(<Value>, <Location>, <Length>)
Example: SUBSTRING( {Name} , 5, 10)

o

If-Then-Else:
IF_THEN_ELSE(<Condition>, <Value1>, <Value2>)
Example: IF_THEN_ELSE( ( {Priority} = 'Low'),
1,IF_THEN_ELSE( ( {Priority} = 'Medium'), 2, IF_THEN_ELSE( ( {Priority}
= 'High'), 3, 0)))

o

If-Then-Else: Allows the user to insert a conditional calculation into the scripted
calculation. IF_THEN_ELSE calculations can be nested to support “ELSE IF”
type calculations as well.
IF_THEN_ELSE(<Condition>, <Value1>, <Value2>)
Example: ,
IF_THEN_ELSE( ( {Priority} = 'Low'), 'Good'
IF_THEN_ELSE( ( {Priority} = 'Medium'), 'Better'. 'Best') )

o

Instring: Returns the value of the search.
INSTRING(<Value1>, <Value to Search>)
Example: INSTRING({Name}, 'a')

o

Lowercase: Returns the value in lower case
LOWERCASE(<Value>)
Example: LOWERCASE ({Task Code})

o

Maximum: Returns the maximum value from a list of attributes. There can be
any number of parameters.
MAX <Value1>, <Value2>, <ValueN>)
Example: MAX( {Scripted Substring Loc a}, {Scripted Substring Loc s},
{Scripted Substring Loc t} )

o

Minimum: Returns the minimum value from a list of attributes. There can be
any number of parameters.
MIN <Value1>, <Value2>, <ValueN>)
Example: MIN( {Scripted Substring Loc a}, {Scripted Substring Loc s}, {Scripted
Substring Loc t} )

o

Round: Returns the value rounded to the decimal places specified
ROUND <Value1>, <Decimal Places>)
Example: ROUND( ({Scripted Substring Loc t} / 7), '4')

o

172

Substring:

SUBSTRING(<Value>, <Location>, <Length>)
Example: SUBSTRING( {Name}, 4, 10)
o

Text Location: Returns the index of the substring within the value, starting at
1 as the first position.
INSTRING(<Value>, <Value To Search>)
Example: INSTRING( UPPERCASE( {Name} ), 'TAX' )

o

Uppercase: Returns the value in upper case.
UPPERCASE(<Value>)
Example: UPPERCASE( {Name} )

The following validation checks are performed when you attempt to save the Scripted
Calculation:
l

The Syntax of the Calculation is correct

l

The Attributes and Functions specified in the Calculation exist

l

Parameters to Functions are correct

l

No Circular Loops exist

Importing List Attributes
ä To import attributes of type List:
1

Create an import file of type List in a TXT file format, with each value on a separate line.

For example:
Blue
Yellow
Red
Green

The import option is always “Replace All”.

2

Click the Navigator icon

3

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

4

Under Manage, select Attributes.

5

Select an attribute of type List, and then click Actions, and then Edit.

6

Click Import

7

Browse to a TXT import file.

8

Click Import. Import List Values displays the values: Total List Values, Completed, Errored, List Values
Created, and List Values Updated.

.

.

If Completed Successfully, click OK.

173

schedules. 5 Click Edit. When you delete an attribute. Editing Attributes You can edit the name of a custom attribute. 7 Click OK. 3 Under Manage. click Close Manager. ä To duplicate attributes: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. or delete list values.If Completed with Errors. 6 Edit the attribute name. you can also add. task types. After a custom attribute is saved. Duplicating Attributes You can duplicate attributes. Deleting Attributes You can delete attributes that you no longer need. click Export to Excel . To export the error list. you can't change its type. or delete list values. . the errors are listed. rename. the system removes all references to the attribute. select Attributes. 3 Under Manage. select Attributes. click Close Manager. If the attribute type is a List. Note: If the attribute is a List type. All related templates. . ä To edit attributes: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. you can add. rename. 174 . 6 Click Close. 4 Select an attribute. 4 Select an attribute. or tasks are updated. 5 Click Duplicate.

then Columns. and then select Show All. select Attributes. select Attributes.ä To delete attributes: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box. or show all. You can also reorder columns. then Columns. To display all columns. sort columns by ascending or descending order. 6 At the delete confirmation prompt. ä To display columns: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Searching for Attributes You can use the Manage Attributes dialog box to find attributes. . select View. To reorder columns. 3 Under Manage. and drag the columns to the desired width. ä To search for attributes: 1 Under Manage. 175 . Viewing Attributes In Manage Attributes. hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display. select View. click Yes. To change column widths. To display specific columns. 5 Click Delete. and change the column widths. 3 Under Manage. hover over a column header until the Sort icons are displayed. click Close Manager. select columns and use the Up or Down arrows or drag them to change the order. click Close Manager. 4 Do one or more of the following tasks: l l l l l . 4 Select attributes. select View. You can enter full or partial names on which to search. select Attributes. 3 Enter full or partial search criteria for the attribute. and then Reorder Columns. To sort columns. you can specify which columns to display for the list of attributes. and then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. and select or deselect the column names.

For example. Starts with. Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria. Tip: To reset the list to display all attributes. . and attach it to the task. users might encounter roadblocks such as a hardware failure. such as hardware failure. software issues. During the close process. and so on. The System Administrator resolves the login issue. 5 Click Search. click Advanced. and so on. Creating Alert Types You can create alert types to group alerts into categories. You can maintain a list of alert types to categorize alerts. Managing Alert Types Subtopics l l l l l Creating Alert Types Editing Alert Types Viewing Alert Types Searching for Alert Types Deleting Alert Types Note: The Managing Alert Types feature is only available to administrators. then closes the alert or submits it for approval. click Close Manager. The user creates the alert indicating “Software Issue” as the type and assigns it to the System Administrator. you can analyze the types of issues that users encounter during the close cycle and make changes to prevent them in future cycles. system failure. system failures. Using alert types.4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains. Ends with). software issues. They can create an alert identifying the problem. ä To create an alert type: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 Under Manage. click Reset. and then enter search criteria. select Alert Types. 176 . a user is running an AP Period Close process and can’t log on to the AP system.

7 Click Enabled to enable the alert type. 6 For Description. To change column widths. ä To edit an alert type: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. enter an alert type name. enter an alert type description. or show all. or change the column widths. select View. and specify whether they are Enabled. 5 For Name. You can also reorder columns. 3 Under Manage.4 Click New. To display all columns. select View. and then select Show All. hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display. and then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. then Columns. select columns and use the Up or Down arrows or drag them to change the order. Viewing Alert Types In Manage Alert Types. To sort columns. you can specify which columns to display for the list of alert types. To display specific columns. sort columns by ascending or descending order. select Alert Types. hover over a column header until the Sort icons are displayed. 4 Click Edit. then Columns. click Close Manager. and drag the columns to the desired width. 5 Edit the alert type. and select or deselect the column names. select View. 6 Click OK. To reorder columns. 177 . select Alert Types. ä To display columns: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Manage. 3 Do one or more of the following tasks: l l l l l . . and then Reorder Columns. Editing Alert Types You can edit the names and descriptions of alert types. 8 Click OK to save the alert type.

When an alert type is deleted.Searching for Alert Types You can use the Manage Alert Types dialog box to find alert types. ä To search for alert types: 1 Under Manage. 4 In Manage Alerts. 2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box. 178 . Deleting Alert Types You can delete alert types. 5 Click Search. select the alert type. ä To delete an alert type: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. select Alert Types. rather it loses its alert type assignment. select Alert Types. 4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains. click Advanced. and enter search criteria. 3 Enter a partial or full name on which to search. click Reset. Starts with. Ends with). You can enter full or partial names on which to search. Tip: To reset the list to display all alert types. the alert is not deleted. Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria. click Close Manager. 5 Click Delete. 3 Under Manage. .

.................................................................................................................................................. 183 Working With Task Type Rules ..................11 Managing Task Types In This Chapter Task Types ........... or attributes................... you can select the Data Load Task Type and the questions are automatically included in the tasks.......................................... 189 Exporting Task Types.............. l Parent Task: Enables you to create parent tasks to define task hierarchies............... 179 .............................................................................................. When you create data load tasks.................... 188 Searching for Task Types ...................................... questions............................................................ 181 Specifying Task Type Questions ....................................................................... if you have a set of required questions to be answered by users responsible for data loads............................... 190 Deleting Task Types ........ 180 Setting Task Type Parameters................................... 190 Task Types Task Types are saved definitions of commonly performed tasks......................................................................... For example............................................................. 182 Assigning Task Type Attributes......................... 181 Specifying Task Type Instructions............................................ 180 Setting Task Type Properties ............................. Task Types enable you to set default information. 188 Importing Task Types ................................................................. but can only view those of others............. 179 Creating Task Types.......... 185 Viewing Task Type History ................................. 186 Editing Task Types ..................................... Data Entry or General Ledger Extract. you must be assigned the Service Administrator or Power User security role.... Two predefined Task Types are installed by default: l Basic Task: Basic Task Type that does not contain instructions................................ They identify and categorize tasks commonly performed during a close period.................................. and questions or instructions that are shared by all tasks of that type.. for example.................................... Power Users can create their own Task Types.............. To create and manage Task Types.......... 187 Viewing Task Types....................... you can create a Data Load Task Type with the required questions......................................... such as settings that must be input by the user.......................

then click OK. click Browse to search for and select an Integration Type. 4 Click New. 4 Enter a Task Type description. 3 Select Manage. 2 Enter a name for the Task Type. and then select Task Types. 5 See also: . l “Setting Task Type Properties” on page 180 l “Setting Task Type Parameters” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Instructions” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Questions” on page 182 l “Working With Task Type Rules” on page 185 l “Viewing Task Type History” on page 186 Setting Task Type Properties The Properties tab enables you to set the name. For End User Types. click Close Manager. 5 To specify an Integration Type. and description. or questions or instructions that are shared by all tasks of that type. 7 See also: l 180 “Setting Task Type Parameters” on page 181 . select Allow Early Start to allow the Assignee to open the task before the scheduled start time. ä To create a Task Type: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. and associate an Integration Type. 3 Enter a Task Type ID that can be used to identify the Task Type. The Properties tab is displayed by default. if all task predecessor conditions have been met. ID. Selecting an Integration Type enables the Task Type to inherit the parameters from that Integration Type. you can allow an Assignee to open a pending task prior to the scheduled time. ä To set Task Type properties: 1 Create a new Task Type. such as settings that need to be input by the user.Creating Task Types Task Types enable you to set default information for a task. 6 Optional: For an End-User Type.

ä To specify instructions: 1 Select Manage. 181 . 3 Enter parameter values as required. date-driven parameters for Data Entry tasks may need to be set to the current month each time they are added to a schedule. or URLs to websites. ä To set Task Type parameters: 1 Select Manage. Click New. 4 Optional: To enable the parameter to be overridden at scheduling time. select Override at scheduling. You can also add references to documents. select the Parameters tab. 5 See also: l “Setting Task Type Properties” on page 180 l “Specifying Task Type Instructions” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Questions” on page 182 l “Working With Task Type Rules” on page 185 l “Viewing Task Type History” on page 186 Specifying Task Type Instructions You can create a set of instructions for completing tasks. When you set Task Type parameters. Some tasks contain parameters that need to be changed each time that they are applied to a schedule. you can attach a policy document as a reference. you can specify which parameters can be overridden during the scheduling process. 2 From the New Task Type dialog box. or a link to a product instruction guide. For example.l “Specifying Task Type Instructions” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Questions” on page 182 l “Working With Task Type Rules” on page 185 l “Viewing Task Type History” on page 186 Setting Task Type Parameters The Parameters tab enables you to set the parameters for the Task Type. and then select Task Types. Parameter values can be set at the Task Type level or at the task level. Note: The Parameters tab is available only if you have selected an Integration Type that has parameters that must be defined. For example. files. Click New. and then select Task Types.

4 From the New Question dialog box. and then select Task Types. 3 In Instructions. 3 See also: l “Setting Task Type Properties” on page 180 l “Setting Task Type Parameters” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Questions” on page 182 l “Working With Task Type Rules” on page 185 l “Viewing Task Type History” on page 186 Tip: To delete a reference. click Browse to select and attach the file. select a question type: 182 l Date l Date and Time l Integer . 2 Select the Questions tab. and click OK.2 Select the Instructions tab. and click OK. Note: The Questions tab is not available for a Task Type that uses an automated Integration Type. Specifying Task Type Questions You can specify Task Type questions that apply to all tasks with that Task Type. and click Delete. for Question. http://www. ä To specify questions: 1 Select Manage. enter the text for the question. l URL Enter a URL name.com. ä To add a reference: 1 In the References section. for example: Oracle. enter the instruction text. select the reference.oracle. Click New. then enter the URL. select one of these types: l Local File Enter a name. 5 From the Type list. 3 Click New. click Add. 2 From the Type list.

without scrolling. You can later filter by the attribute value.select if you want the custom attribute to include an attachments section. When you select an attribute. 183 .000 characters. select the question and click Delete. Include Attachments. Move Up. or Move to Bottom. The purpose of assigning a role is to determine which role can answer the question: l Assignee l Approver l Owner l Viewer Note: When re-ordering questions. you can only re-order within a role. Move Down. select the question and click Edit. 11 See also: l “Setting Task Type Properties” on page 180 l “Setting Task Type Parameters” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Instructions” on page 181 l “Working With Task Type Rules” on page 185 l “Viewing Task Type History” on page 186 Assigning Task Type Attributes To locate Task Types in the system. 6 Assign a Role. select Required. To remove a question.l List Enter a list of valid responses to the question. you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. 9 Optional: To change the order of questions. select a question. 8 Click OK to save the question. The Required checkbox is disabled for Questions assigned to Owner or Viewer roles. Enter the Number of Lines. Tip: To edit a question. from 3 to 50 lines. 10 Click Save and Close to save the Task Type. Multi-Line text determines how many lines of text are visible. 7 If the question is required. l Multi-Line Text The maximum length should be less than 4. then click Move to Top. you can apply attributes to the Task Type. on the Actions dialog boxes.

To add an attribute. click Close Manager. list views. Allow Edits—Has the ability to add. . 3 Under Manage. Enter: l Attribute Select an attribute from the list of defined attributes. User.” ä To apply an attribute: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. or Viewer. Click OK. for example. Select one of the Role access types. To add an access. Click New. Enables administrators to assign attributes and provide values for the attributes. Required—Requires a value for the attribute. South. l Access All roles have view access unless otherwise specified in the Access box. and Approvers are prevented from approving. l Value Select a value associated with the type of attribute. d. and remove values for the attribute. Approver. with separate roles for each Approver level currently in use in the application. Select a role: Owner. a numeric value for Formatted Number attribute. Click Add. Until a value is provided. 5 Click OK. or reports. select Task Types. and then Add. Assignee. m m m Do Not Display—Does not see this attribute on the Task Actions dialog box. a List for List attribute. you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North. change. 4 Select the Attributes tab. 6 See also: 184 . b. The Required option is available for Assignees and Approvers.For example. a name of a person. select Actions. so you can add the Sales Region attribute and set it to “West. but subject to the editability rules. Assignees are prevented from submitting. c. and West. multiple lines of displayed text without scrolling for Multi-Line Text. or in any of the dashboards. The current Task Type applies only to the West Sales Region. or Yes or No for the Yes/No attribute. East. for each of the roles: a. l Type This noneditable field is populated by the Attribute.

Available task type rules: l Auto Approve Task—Automatically completes specified approvals only if specified conditions have been met. When conditions are satisfied. Prevent Task Submission—This rule prevents submission of a task based on attribute values.. the specified approver levels are marked as complete. Auto-Submit Task rule runs when the Task status changes from Pending to Open with Assignee. 3 Select Manage. thus progressing workflow to the first approval level. appearing on the Rules tab in that dialog. Example of conditions that could apply to this rule: If attributes have specified values (including calculated attributes) When conditions are satisfied. or other characteristics. or other characteristics. You can view the following information: . This rule runs when the Assignee clicks Submit. This rule runs when the Approver clicks Approve. the assignee role is marked as complete. in read-only form for template tasks. click Close Manager. and then select Task Types.l “Setting Task Type Properties” on page 180 l “Setting Task Type Parameters” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Instructions” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Questions” on page 182 l “Working With Task Type Rules” on page 185 l “Viewing Task Type History” on page 186 Working With Task Type Rules Task Type Rules apply to all Tasks of the same Task Type and thus serve as a convenient mechanism to apply rules to groups of Tasks. 4 Click a task type and then click Edit. 185 . or to Closed if no additional approval levels exist. ä To work with task type rules: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. or to Closed if no approval levels exist. thus progressing workflow to the next approval level. and copied to schedule tasks. Auto Approve Task runs when the Task status changes to Open with Approver. l Auto Submit Task—Causes a task to be submitted automatically if specified conditions are met. 5 Select the Rules tab. Rules configured on the Task Type dialog propagate down to the Edit Task Dialog. l l Prevent Task Approval—This rule prevents approval of a task based on attribute values.

and the Prevent Task Approval rule. and Value behave as they do for the existing advanced filter feature. Approver Level—Select the rule for all levels or select the Approver levels. Explain why you configured the rule and how should be used.6 l Order—The order of precedence. and then select a filter. Operand. Specific Task (Provide the Task ID). The History tab displays the components that were updated. l Rule—Name of the Rule l Conditions—The choice of what conditions must exist before running the rule To edit a rule. Note: The Approver Level must be set on the Auto Approve Task rule. the modification 186 . Conditions—Select one: m m Use Saved Filter—The Conditions section displays a read-only version of the conditions associated with the saved filter. on the Rules tab. The filter selected and configured for the rule determines the conditions that trigger the rule to apply. click Edit and update: l Rule—Select a rule. Any Predecessor. Message to Assignee—Define an optional message to assignee in a prevent task submission rule. Create Filter—The Condition section is enabled. which you can view from the Manage Task Types dialog box. See also: l “Setting Task Type Properties” on page 180 l “Setting Task Type Parameters” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Instructions” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Questions” on page 182 l “Viewing Task Type History” on page 186 Viewing Task Type History The system maintains a history of Task Type actions. l Message (On some rules) m m l Message to Approver—Define an optional message to approver in a prevent task approval rule. Attribute. l l Select Create Filter and populate the conditions section or select Use Saved Filter. l 7 Filter Task—Specify on which task the conditions should be selected: Current Task. Source. l Description—Optional. Conjunction.

Changes to the Task Type (instructions. ä To edit a Task Type: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Click the Edit icon. and then select Task Types. and then Edit. the old and new values. 5 Use one of these methods: . or change the order of questions. and so on). the effect is immediate. add or delete questions. 5 Click Edit. For tasks in a template. you can edit Task Types. ä To view Task Type history: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Right-click and select Edit. click Close Manager. For example. you can add or delete attributes. edit instructions. 187 . are automatically updated in tasks of that type. click Close Manager. click Save and Close or Cancel. and then select Task Types. l “Setting Task Type Properties” on page 180 l “Setting Task Type Parameters” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Instructions” on page 181 l “Specifying Task Type Questions” on page 182 l “Working With Task Type Rules” on page 185 Editing Task Types From the Manage Task Types dialog box. The information on the History tab is read-only and cannot be changed. l Select Actions. 4 Select the Task Type that you want to edit. 7 When you finish. questions. There is no effect if you edit a Task Type in a schedule. the user who made the modification. 3 Select Manage. 3 Select Manage. 8 See also: . edit parameters. Editing Task Types may have an effect on tasks that are created from the Task Type. 4 Select a Task Type. 6 Select the History tab.type. and the change date.

and drag the columns to the desired width. then Columns. click Close Manager. ä To display columns: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 3 Select Manage. 188 . and then Reorder Columns. you can specify columns to display for the list of Task Types. and select or deselect the column names. hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display. To display all columns. and then select Task Types. select View. and then select Task Types. and enter search criteria. Ends with). Searching for Task Types You can use the Task Types dialog box to find Task Types. You can enter full or partial names on which to search. . 3 Select Manage. select columns and use the Up or Down arrows or drag them to change the order. To sort columns. sort columns by ascending or descending order. 7 Click Save and Close. 4 Do one or more of the following tasks: l l l l l . click Close Manager. Viewing Task Types In Manage Task Types. To reorder columns. You can reorder columns. 4 Click the Expand > sign to expand the Search box. or show all. and then select Show All. To display specific columns.6 Select the tab for the information you want to edit and edit the Task Type. then Columns. 6 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains. and then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. ä To search for Task Types: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Advanced. Starts with. To change column widths. 5 Enter full or partial search criteria for the Task Type. select View. select View. hover over a column header until the Sort icons are displayed. or change the column widths.

click Close Manager. Update—Updates partial information for Task Types. To import Task Types. This option is not a full replacement of the Task Type details. By default. This option replaces all Task Type detail with the information that is in the file that you are importing. click Reset. Date formats are not translated. 7 Date Format Select a Date Format from the drop-down list of allowed date formats. and then Import. click Task Types. Replace—Completely replaces the definition of a Task Type with the definition in the import file. The system displays a warning that task types matching a task type ID in the import file will be modified. the date format is set to the local date format of the exported file location. Importing Task Types You can import Task Types or partial Task Type information from text files. Note: Task Type rules cannot be imported. If you do not want to overwrite the task type. 5 Click Browse and navigate to the file. For example: l MM/dd/yyyy l dd/MM/yyyy 189 . ä To import Task Types: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Tip: To reset the list to display all Task Types. Only details for the Task Type properties specified in the file are updated. 4 Click Actions. 6 Select an import option: l l . It does not affect Task Types that are not specified in the import file. you must have the Service Administrator or Close Power User security role.Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria. 3 Under Manage. The process is similar to importing tasks into a template. Use Migration to import Task Type rules. click Cancel. 7 Click Search.

8 l dd-MMM-yy l MMM d. 3 From Manage Task Types. click Close Manager. l Right-click and select Delete. ä To delete a Task Type: 1 From Manage Task Types. click Yes. . 5 Select a location in which to save the file. . 2 Use one of these methods: 3 190 l Select Actions. Note: Task Type rules cannot be exported. Use Migration to export Task Type rules. Deleting Task Types You can delete Task Types that you no longer need. 4 Click Save File. l Click the Delete icon. ä To export Task Types: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. yyyy Click Import. then modify and reimport the file. select the Task Type that you want to delete. which can be read by Excel. and then Delete. select a Task Type. and then OK. At the delete confirmation prompt. Exporting Task Types You can export Task Types to a comma-separated values (CSV) file. then click Export. To delete a Task Type. you must have Service Administrator or Power User security rights. and click Save. Note: You cannot delete a Task Type if tasks belong to it.

..... 202 Exporting Tasks to Microsoft Excel... delete................... for example....................................................................... but are defined using generic days.................. you can create....................................................... 210 A task template defines a repeatable set of tasks required for a close period................................................................................................................. 208 Viewing Templates ...... such as monthly or quarterly............. 209 Searching for Templates.............................................................................. 209 Deleting Templates ................................................... If you are a Service Administrator or Power User... You use templates to generate schedules for specific close periods....................... based on close process activities................... day 0....... 206 Manually Validating Templates ................................................................... 199 Adding Tasks to Templates......................................................... 205 Creating Schedules from Templates............................ 205 Reassigning Users .......................................................................12 Managing Task Templates In This Chapter Creating Task Templates ................... day-2........................................... You apply the task flow defined in the template to calendar dates when you create schedules.............. day-3................................................................................................................. Template tasks are not assigned to specific days on a calendar................. edit......................... 191 ...... day-1........................................... You can create templates for different types of close periods.. 192 Opening Templates .......... 200 Editing Templates ................ and have viewer rights to templates.................... It is used as a basis for creating schedules........ 200 Importing Tasks into Templates........ 200 Task Import File Format .......

click Close Manager. and time span. 4 Click New. You must assign a template owner to every template. ä To create a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. description. and then select Templates. such as a Quarterly template to encompass all tasks involved in a quarterly close. The template owner is also the default owner of all tasks in the template unless overridden at the task level. you can assign users or groups as viewers. 5 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: . which must be a Service Administrator or Power User. You might further define separate templates for a Headquarters Quarterly Close and a Regional Quarterly Close. When you create a template.Creating Task Templates Subtopics l l l l l l l l Setting Template Properties Specifying Template Instructions Assigning Viewers Applying Template Attributes Specifying Day Labels Embedding Templates Working With Template Rules Viewing Template History You can create templates for specific tasks. l “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 Setting Template Properties The Properties tab enables you to specify the template name. The current ID is the default owner. 192 . owner. 3 Select Manage.

on the Properties tab. and so on. You can attach additional references. You may also want to supply additional detail to help users understand the purpose of the template and how to complete the tasks. select the Instructions tab. Day-4. Days after Day Zero are represented as Day 3. 3 Click OK. 3 For Owner. select a number. The instructions are also transferred to each schedule. but the same person cannot perform more than one role. enter instruction text for each task in the template to include. Users can view the instructions from tasks in the template. l For Number of Days Before Day 0. enter: l Name l Description l Organizational Unit Enter the time span for the template. 4 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 Specifying Template Instructions You can specify instructions in the template for completing the close process. l For Number of Days After Day 0. 2 In Instructions. Any member of the Shared Services group can perform the role. Day 4. A template has at least one day (Day Zero). You can specify the number of days a template tracks before and after the Zero day. which is usually the day the company closes its books. use the default owner or click Select Owner . ä To set template properties: 1 2 From the New or Edit Template dialog. ä To specify template instructions: 1 From the New or Edit Template dialog. select a number. even if you do not specify days before or after it. 193 . Days before Day Zero are represented as Day-5. Administrators. or Power Users configured with the Administrator or Power User roles are the only roles that will display when the user clicks Search to select a user to assign as an Owner. and so on.Tasks in a template are organized by numeric template days. Each template has a Day Zero.

3 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: l “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 Assigning Viewers The Viewers tab enables you to assign viewer rights to users who may view tasks in the schedule and schedule tasks that are generated from the template. ä To assign viewer rights: 1 From the New or Edit Template dialog. or Teams. then move them to the Selected box. click Search Users. such as groups and roles. then enter a User ID. select IDs.com. then select Users. A Power User viewer can view the template details and template tasks as read-only. 8 Click Add or Add All to move users to the Selected list. click Browse to select and attach the file. l URL Enter a URL name. 7 For additional details about the user. You can assign multiple users to a template as viewers.ä To add a reference: 1 In the References section. 4 Enter a full or partial user name. 5 To specifically identify a user. 9 194 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: . click Add. select them and click Remove or Remove All. and click OK. and click OK. http://www. and only read-only access to schedules produced from the template. Viewers can be a group assignment. then enter the URL. 6 From the Search Results list. for example: Oracle. 2 From the Type list. 3 To search by users or groups. click Details. Email address. select one of these types: l Local File Enter a name. 2 Click Add. then click Search. or Description.oracle. Tip: To remove users. A Close User viewer has no template access. click Advanced. select the Viewers tab. Groups.

You can later filter by the attribute value. 6 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: l “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 Specifying Day Labels You can customize the names of days in the template. or enter a value. 195 .” ä To apply an attribute: 1 From the New or Edit Template dialog. select the Attributes tab. 4 For Value. South. so you can add the Sales Region attribute and set it to “West. East.l “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 Applying Template Attributes To locate templates in the system. For example. select a value for the attribute from a drop-down list. The current template applies only to the West Sales Region. you can apply attributes to the template. 2 Click Add. you can rename Day 2 to Data Entry Day. you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North. and West. 5 Click OK. you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. Day Labels created in a template are copied to any schedule created from the template. When you select an attribute. depending on the attribute. Editing the name of the day does not change its sequential order. For example. select an attribute. 3 From the Attribute list.

ä To embed templates: 1 From the New or Edit Template dialog. then Template B cannot be embedded in another template. Note: Only one level of embedding is possible. you do not need to update the Quarterly. 5 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: l 196 “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 . For example. if Template A is embedded in Template B. When you schedule tasks for a template. For example. select the template from the Embedded Templates list and click Remove or Remove All to move it to the Available Templates list. 4 Click OK. you can specify that the Quarterly template embeds the Monthly template so if you change the Monthly template. select the Embedded Templates tab. tasks for embedded templates are also scheduled. select the Day Labels tab. 4 Click OK. Instead of copying the Monthly template. 2 Select a day to rename. Tip: To remove a template or templates.ä To specify day labels: 1 From the New or Edit Template dialog. When you generate a schedule from the Quarterly template. 2 From the Available Templates list. select a template to embed. the schedule includes the tasks from the Monthly template. the Quarterly close process may be the same as the Monthly close process with some additional quarterly-only tasks. 3 Click Move to move the template to the Embedded Templates list. 3 Rename the day from its default value to a custom name. 5 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: l “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 Embedding Templates You can reuse tasks from one template in another by embedding a template into another template.

in read-only form. Prevent Task Submission—This rule prevents submission of a task based on attribute values. Auto Submit Task runs when the Task status changes from Pending to Open with Assignee. This rule runs when the Task status changes to Open with Approver. This rule runs when the Assignee clicks Submit. thus progressing workflow to the first approval level. It will only run when FINISH-TOFINISH predecessors have completed without error and FINISH ERROR-TO-FINISH predecessors have completed. and rules are also applied to groups of tasks. or other characteristics. Notes: 1. the rule causes the assignee role to be marked as complete. or to Closed if no approval levels exist. Template rules: l Auto Approve Task—Automatically completes specified approvals if specified conditions have been met. Auto Submit Task rule honors predecessor relationship. Examples of conditions that could apply to this rule: l Attributes have specified values (including calculated attributes) l Predecessor task contains an attribute with a specified value When conditions are satisfied. or other characteristics. l l Prevent Task Approval—This rule prevents approval of a task based on attribute values. it should check for its RUNNING successors and trigger Auto Submit Task rules if necessary. Rules that you configure in the Template dialog box apply to the Schedule dialog box and the Edit Task dialog box.l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 Working With Template Rules Template rules apply to all tasks in the template. Auto Submit Task rule is not triggered when the task has missing parameters. and workflow progresses to the next approval level or is closed if no additional approval levels exist. the rule causes the specified approver levels to be marked as complete. and they are displayed on the Rules tabs. When a FINISH-TO-FINISH predecessor is Closed by either user or rules. 197 . l Auto Submit Task—Automatically submits a task if specified conditions are met. 2. When conditions have been satisfied. This rule runs when the Approver clicks Approve.

8 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: l “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 . You can view the following information: 6 . click Close Manager. Attribute. click Create or Edit and update: l Rule—Select a rule. Conditions—Select one: m m Use Saved Filter—The Conditions section displays a read-only version of the conditions associated with the saved filter. l Rule—Select the Rule l Conditions—The choice of what conditions must exist before running the rule To create or edit a rule. click the appropriate button and follow the instructions. Specific Task (Provide the Task ID). 5 Select the Rules tab. and Value behave as they do for the existing advanced filter feature. 7 To delete. l Filter Task— Specify on which task the condition should be selected: Current Task. on the Rules tab. Operand. 3 Select Manage. 198 l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Viewing Template History” on page 199 . 4 Double-click a template. duplicate. Source. l Description—Optional. l Approver Level—Select the rule for all levels or select the Approver levels l l Select Create Filter and populate the conditions section or select Use Saved Filter. Any Predecessor. Explain why you configured the rule and how should be used. and then select Templates. Create Filter—The Condition section is enabled. The filter selected and configured for the rule determines the conditions that trigger the rule to apply.ä To work with template rules: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Conjunction. l Order—The order of precedence. or reorder a rule. and then select a filter.

l “Setting Template Properties” on page 192 l “Specifying Template Instructions” on page 193 l “Assigning Viewers” on page 194 l “Applying Template Attributes” on page 195 l “Specifying Day Labels” on page 195 l “Embedding Templates” on page 196 l “Working With Template Rules” on page 197 Opening Templates You can open templates from the Manage Templates dialog box.Viewing Template History The system maintains a history of template actions. and then Open. 6 Select the History tab. 7 Click OK. 8 Enter the necessary information in the template tabs: . The information on the History tab is read-only. the old and new values. the modification type. which you can view from the Template dialog box. the user who made the modification. select Templates. l Click the Open icon. ä To open a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. select a template. 5 Click Edit. 4 Select a template for which to view history. The History tab displays the components that were created or updated. l Select Actions. ä To view template history: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Close Manager. 3 Under Manage. 5 Use one of these methods: . and then select Templates. l Right-click and select Open. 3 Select Manage. and the change date. 199 . 4 From Manage Templates. click Close Manager.

or partial task data. 4 Select a template and click Actions. 3 Under Manage. copy. ä To add a task to a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. End-User tasks also have an end date and time. and then select Edit. . such as the name of a template and the number of days before and after Day Zero. 5 Add tasks as required. and then select Templates. If you reduce the number of days before or after the Day Zero. Importing Tasks into Templates You can import tasks. rather than creating individual tasks. You can edit. Editing a template has no effect on schedules previously generated from that template. ä To edit a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 4 Select and open a template. from text files such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. tasks associated with those days are removed. click Close Manager. 3 Select Manage. and System-Automated tasks have a duration when added to a template. 200 .Adding Tasks to Templates You can add tasks to templates. Editing Templates You can edit templates to change the properties. into a template. and then import it into a template. select Templates. For example. you can enter task definitions as rows in Excel. You must be working in the source template to edit tasks from embedded templates. click Close Manager. 5 Edit the template properties. and delete tasks in a template. . save the file as a comma-separated values (CSV) file. The start day in a template corresponds to template days. Each task has a start date and time. You can also use the Import feature to quickly add many repetitive tasks by editing the fields in a text file and importing it. rather than to calendar days. 6 Click OK. 6 Click OK.

Assignees. The update option is not a full replacement of the task details. 4 From Manage Templates. Only details for the task properties specified in the file are updated. Assignee. you might have made changes to task instructions. in the import file. or removed some attributes and added new attributes. For example. l Replace All Imports a new set of tasks that replaces the tasks in a template. and Approvers. For example. the task name. 5 Click Import Tasks. and other properties are not affected. It does not affect other tasks in the template that are not specified in the import file. Only details for the task properties specified in the file are updated. adding a new attribute to 100 of 400 tasks. This option replaces the task detail with the detail that is in the file that you are importing. the task name. ä To import tasks into a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. select a template into which to import tasks. and other properties are not affected. Assignee. The update option is not a full replacement of the task details. attributes. To import tasks. This option is useful when you want to replace a template in one system with an updated definition from another system. 3 Under Manage. or removed some attributes and added new attributes. select Templates. if the import file has only a column for a task instructions.Note: Before you import tasks into a template. 7 Select an import option: l l . You might also have made the same change to a large number of tasks. reassigned Owners. or click Browse to find the file. you must specify task IDs that are unique in the template to ensure that no two tasks have the same ID. and Approvers. if the import file has only a column for a task instructions. click Close Manager. you must have security rights to edit the template. l Update Updates partial information for tasks. attributes. Replace—Replaces the definition of a task with the definition in the import files. Assignees. Update—Updates partial information for tasks. Tasks that are not specified in the import file are deleted from the template. For example. For example. you might have made changes to task instructions. Three options are available for importing tasks into a template: l Replace Replaces the definition of a task with the definition in the import file. adding a new attribute to 100 of 400 tasks. 201 . It does not affect other tasks that are not specified in the import file. for example. in the import file. for example. reassigned Owners. You might also have made the same change to a large number of tasks. 6 Enter the name of the file to import.

The first row contains only the column headings that identify the data in that column. To replace question text. a task may have many viewers. 202 . View the errors. Many column IDs may have an indeterminate amount of values. or TaskTypeID when you are importing Task Types. or references. approvers. When you select Update mode. questions. or References only represent the relative order with the other approvers. the “Import Success” dialog box is displayed. Separate rows are used to define each task. or reference names. For example. When you use the Replace or Replace All options. When you update these. When you use the Update option. For example: 9 l l l MM/dd/yyyy l dd/MM/yyyy l dd-MMM-yy l MMM d. you must use Replace mode. Click OK. The numbers that you append to the column IDs for Approvers. You use the numeric IDs to uniquely identify predecessors and parent tasks. You can add parameters by modifying the ending number. there are no required columns except TaskID. click Cancel to cancel the import process. and shift the columns but you cannot remove required columns. the import process is not run. yyyy Click Import. the name of the file containing the tasks. indicating that the template name. the date format is set to the locale date format of the exported file location. the system matches by the name of the approver. TaskName. you can add. then click OK to return to Manage Templates. or reference if the file names do not match. or reference without regard to the number in the file format column. Questions. Task Import File Format The task import file enables you to specify the task information that you want to import into a template. and the total number of tasks imported. and the “Import Errors” dialog box displays errors.Note: The system displays a warning that tasks in the template that match a task ID in the import file will be modified. For example. you enter the numeric ID of the task rather than the task name. remove. Viewer4. when you enter a parent task in the Parent column. Viewer5. If the import is successful. and so on. 8 Date Format Select a Date Format from the drop-down list of allowed date formats. for example. By default. question. Each task in the file must be given a unique ID in the TaskID column. The data in each column must match the column ID in the first row. If you do not want to overwrite the task. Date formats are not translated. the system only adds a new question. If errors are found. approver. for example.

Boolean StartEarly Whether the Assignee is allowed to open a pending task prior to the scheduled start time Boolean RunAs RunAs user name. For groups of column headings. 0. there must be a corresponding QType5. you must have the same number for other members. 1. Text TaskName Name of task Text TaskType Task Type Text Lookup Description Full description of task. StartTime Start time in HH:MM (24-hour). Maximum of 80 characters. the start date must be a calendar date in the locale format. if you have QText5. in HH:MM (24-hour). in template days (for example. 12) Integer For schedules. Document) Text Lookup RefURL# Reference URL. Low) Text Lookup StartDate Start date. 1. Maximum of 1000 characters. 0. the end date must be a calendar date in the locale format. Medium. if you have a certain number of one of the group. Maximum of 2 GB. for example: 13:00 Integer EndDate User tasks only. 13:00 Integer Duration Task duration in minutes (automated tasks only) Number Owner Task owner Text Lookup Assignee Task Assignee (user tasks only) Text Lookup Active Whether the task is active. in template days (for example.All Text Lookup rows in the file must match values stored in the application. for URL references URL RefDocId# Reference document ID. you must have specified values for them when you set up the application. Column ID Description Type TaskID ID of task. if you are importing Task Types. Text Priority Task priority (High. 12) Integer For schedules. for example. -5. Only applicable for system-automated tasks. for URL references Text RefType# Reference type (URL. For example. -5. For example. Text Reference# Instruction reference (URL and Content Server references) URL RefText# Reference name. for document references Integer Approver# Approver Level User Name Viewer# Task viewer User Name 203 . Text Lookup Instruction Instruction text. EndTime User tasks only. Only applies to template import.

in magnitude: 1000 and so on QThouSep# Thousand separator indicator for question X Boolean Attribute# Attribute name.or ( ) QScale# Scale format for question X Number. for example. Predecessor type (for example. Data type of question (Text. Text Lookup PredTemplate# Name of the predecessor template or schedule. Maximum of 255 characters. True/False. for example. Member. Text AttrDisplay Display to user (in task action dialog box) for attribute Boolean Param# Parameter name Text Lookup ParmVal# Parameter value Text Parent Task ID of the task parent Task ID Predecessor# Predecessor task ID (from column A) Task ID PredType# Required. these columns are used: l TaskTypeID l IntegrationType l ParamOverride# . Text of question. if the predecessor belongs to a different template or schedule Text When you import Task Types. which you can modify: l Two questions l Two attributes l Two instructional references l Three predecessor tasks 204 . Finish to Start). It contains these dynamic parameters. Maximum of 255 characters. Text QType# Required for question. and so on) Text Lookup QReq# Required for question. separated by | symbol.whether the parameter can be overridden A sample task import file is provided. Text Lookup QCurrSymbol# Currency format for question X Text QDecPlaces# Number of significant digits after the decimal places for question X Number QNegNumFmt# Negative number format for question X Text: . Color Text Lookup AttrVal# Attribute value. Red.Column ID Description Type QText# Required for question. Question required? (Yes or No) Boolean QList# List of values for question. for example. Red|Green|Blue| Yellow.

When you export tasks from a template. 3 Under Manage. . For example. click Close Manager. enter the first or last name for the user. You can select the roles for which to reassign users. ä To reassign users: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Close Manager. and click Save. 3 Under Manage. opening.l Three approver levels Exporting Tasks to Microsoft Excel You can export tasks from a template to a flat file in CSV format. and click Search. you can export the tasks from a template in a test installation and import them to a template in a production installation. 4 Select the template in which you want to reassign users. 6 Click Save File. select Templates. later that employee leaves the company and another employee assumes those tasks. From the Select User dialog box. however. select Templates. and editing individual tasks. You can use the Reassign feature in the Manage Templates dialog box to automatically change assignments instead of manually searching for. For example. 6 Click Find User and enter the search criteria for the user that you want to replace: . 5 Select Actions. you may create a template and assign a user to certain tasks. and then Reassign User. The Reassign feature enables you to quickly find the tasks associated with one user and reassign them to another. they are saved to a CSV file. ä To export tasks: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. then click OK. a. the system reassigns the user only in tasks in which the user was assigned as the owner. 205 . then use Microsoft Excel to modify the file. select a template from which to export tasks. if you select the Owner role. 5 Click Export Tasks. 4 From Manage Templates. For example. 7 Select a location in which to save the file. Reassigning Users You may periodically need to reassign users to different tasks.

For example. The schedule starts in a Pending status.Success” message that indicates that the user reassignment is complete. When you create a schedule from a template. You use the Predecessor Task Links tab to select predecessor tasks in schedules. you must have the Service Administrator or Power User role. you can select predecessor tasks in schedules as predecessors for tasks with predecessors in other templates. The Predecessor Task Links tab lists all tasks with predecessors in other templates. The dates can also account for non-working days of the schedule if you specified them. The Date Map displays the default calendar date assigned to each template day. Select the user from the results. you can globally update the task parameters for a Task Type if the parameters have the override option enabled. You create schedules from templates from the Manage Templates dialog box. Creating a schedule from a template populates the schedule with the tasks in the template. Template instructions. and enables you to select a predecessor in a schedule for these tasks. The Last Schedule column shows the last schedule created from each template. 206 . the system displays a “Reassign Users . You can use the Date Map feature to adjust the date assignments. When template tasks are added from a template to a schedule. if Day 0 is a Friday. then click OK. which gives you the opportunity to make final changes in the definition. and displays the template name and total number of user reassignments made. the tasks for Day 1 are placed on the following Monday if you selected to exclude weekend days. they are assigned calendar dates based on their relationship to the template Day Zero. When the process ends. When you create a schedule from a template. The Schedules column shows the total number of schedules created from each template. and attributes are also added to the schedule. the tasks in the embedded templates are included. 7 Click Replace with and enter search criteria for the user to whom you want to reassign tasks.b. Creating Schedules from Templates You can create schedules from templates. If the source template has embedded templates. A task in one template can have predecessor tasks in other templates. To create a schedule from a template. viewers. 8 Select roles for the user that must be reassigned: 9 l Owner l Assignee l Approver l Viewer Click Reassign.

taking into consideration the holiday calendars. Tip: You can create one global template and have that template create the proper schedules for each regional entity. Work Days—If you do not assign an organizational unit to a task. 5 If the template was successfully validated. the Organizational Unit in the Date Mapping panel on the Schedule from Template dialog box displays as Read Only. create the schedule: Click Actions. . On the Schedule Parameters tab. and then select Templates. l Date Mapping m Organizational Unit m Calendar days m Working days m Advanced Configuration dialog box: Click Advanced Configuration to override the Organizational Unit and Work Days configuration for all tasks in the schedule. and you do not use the Override Work Days feature. time zones. and work day configurations of the entity. and then Create Schedule. enter the following fields: l Schedule Name l Year l Period Select a close period for the schedule.ä To create a schedule from a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Day Zero Date Select the calendar date to assign to the template Day Zero. 3 Select Manage. Since all tasks have the same Organizational Unit. 4 Select the template that you want to schedule. click Close Manager. than the application uses the following 207 . o Organizational Unit Select one: l l o Use Task Value—Select a value from the Organizational Unit Set Value To—The selected organizational unit is applied to all tasks in the Schedule (even if the task in the template contained a different Organizational Unit value).

enter a new value. Manually Validating Templates When you generate a schedule from a template. 208 . 3 Under Manage. You can manually validate a template. select the schedule that contains the predecessor task and in the Assigned Task list. you can use the navigation links in the validation results to navigate to the source of the error. the system displays a “Template valid” message. select the predecessor task. and Saturday and Sunday are nonworking days. A schedule is created and populated with the tasks. the system automatically validates the template first to check for uniqueness violations. Review the schedule and make adjustments as needed. 7 Optional: Select the Override Parameters tab. Validation is particularly useful to check for problems after you import tasks into a template from a file. 8 Click Create Schedule. m Date Map—For each template day whose date assignment you want to modify. 5 Click Validate. enter the new date. l If an error is displayed. in the New Value column. select the template that you want to validate. ä To manually validate a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. By default the schedule is opened into a view when created. click Close Manager. or a date-precedence mismatch. If the template has an error. and for each parameter that you want to modify. select Templates. click the link to the error. you cannot have circular predecessors. . 4 From Manage Templates. review the parameters. l If no errors exist. in the Date column. For example. It has a status of Pending. 6 Optional: Select the Predecessor Task Links tab.default: Monday – Friday are working days. tasks that directly or indirectly depend on each other. instructions and viewers from the template. Note: This Override Parameters tab displays only tasks that use a Task Type in which at least one parameter has the Override option enabled.

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria. and drag the columns to the desired width. then Columns. Searching for Templates You can use the Manage Templates dialog box to quickly find templates. you can specify which columns to display for the list of templates. click Close Manager. select View. and then select Show All. . To reorder columns. ä To search for templates: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. You can enter full or partial names on which to search. 5 Enter full or partial search criteria. or show all. hover over a column header until the Sort icons are displayed. click Close Manager. 3 Select Manage. 3 Under Manage. To display all columns. hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display. 4 Click the > sign to expand the Search box. Tip: To reset the list to display all templates. and then Reorder Columns. 4 Do one or more of the following tasks: l l l l l . 6 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains. click Advanced. You can also reorder columns. then Columns. Starts with. To display specific columns. and then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. To sort columns. ä To display columns: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. select View. and then select Templates.Viewing Templates In the Manage Templates dialog box. select Templates. select columns and use the Up or Down arrows or drag them to change the order. or change the column widths. 209 . To change column widths. Ends with). and select or deselect the column names. click Reset. and enter search criteria. select View. sort columns by ascending or descending order. 7 Click Search.

Deleting Templates You can delete templates that you no longer need. 5 Click Delete. It does not directly affect a running schedule. however some reporting and dashboard metrics may use the template to link various schedule runs together. 6 At the confirmation prompt. click Yes. To delete a template. click Close Manager. which are not possible if the template is deleted. you must have security rights to the template. select the template that you want to delete. . Deleting a template removes it from the list of available templates and removes tasks associated with it. ä To delete a template: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. 210 . 3 Under Manage. 4 From Manage Templates. select Templates.

......... 215 Adding Task Questions ........................................... 229 Managing Task Reassignments ............................................................................................................................. 223 Working with the Task Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 230 Aborting Tasks................................................... 214 Selecting the Workflow ............................................ 224 Editing Tasks .......................13 Managing Tasks In This Chapter Creating Tasks................... 226 Searching for Tasks ...................................................................................... 226 Sorting Tasks ............................................................................................... 227 Reopening Tasks ..... Copying................................ 222 Viewing Task History .................................................. 212 Setting Task Properties ....................................................... 228 Submitting Tasks . 227 Cutting............ such as answering questions or approving................................................................................................................................................................................................. 221 Working With Task Rules ............................ 211 .............................................................................. The success or failure of the task process is displayed in the task detail.. Event monitoring tasks are tasks which allow products to monitor processes within external applications............................................. 219 Setting Task Predecessors ....... 214 Specifying Task Instructions...................................................................................... and Pasting Tasks .................................................................................................................................. 224 Importing and Exporting Tasks...................................................................................... 227 Moving Tasks ........... such as data entry or data consolidation....... 219 Applying Task Attributes ....... 230 Tasks are the core units of action in a close process........ 229 Deleting Tasks ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 228 Approving or Rejecting Tasks ..................................................................................................................... such as an overnight feed from a general ledger................ l l l End-user tasks require actions by end users....................... 212 Setting Task Parameters......... System-automated tasks run without user intervention............ 217 Setting Task Access...............................

If you have Service Administrator or Power User security rights. description. priority. or delete tasks. Assignees. l Right-click on a day/date and select New. if an Owner or Assignee is not available to work on the task (due to sick time. You can create a task using any of these methods: l Drag and drop the Task Type onto a template or schedule in a view. During the close cycle. you can then drill into the underlying tasks. and Approvers may also reassign their tasks. you can reassign users associated with a task. Child tasks of parent tasks may have different owners than the parent task. Creating Tasks You can add tasks to templates or schedules. task ID. start and end date or duration. schedule. edit. you assign the start and end date as days before or after Day Zero. template. You can group tasks under parent tasks to provide a simpler view of the close process. has left the company. task type.Each task has different parameters depending on the Task Type. Template. If you create a task in a template. You also use the Properties tab to specify task Owners and Assignees. or schedule. you can create. After viewing upper-level parent tasks. vacation. and task Owners. or is simply too busy). l Right-click on a task and select New. If you create a task in a schedule. 212 . Then enter information in the task tabs: l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Setting Task Properties The Properties tab enables you to set the task name. you select calendar dates for the start and end dates.

or Shared Select Active to include this task in schedules generated from the template. l For Event Monitoring tasks. l Priority Select a priority for the task: l m High m Medium m Low Owner Use the default owner or click Select Owner Services group. l Task Type (required) Click Browse and select a Task Type. Note: This option is not available for tasks created in schedules. 2 On the Properties tab. Enter a Description of 1000 characters or less. l to select a user. ä To set task properties: 1 Open a New Task. or viewer or commentator assignments. and Instructions. Define a separate organizational unit for each entity for which separate reporting is required. Organizational Units are defined in system settings. Enter a Task ID that can be used to identify the task (required). you can allow an Assignee to open a pending task prior to the scheduled time. Note: You can use carriage returns and URLs in Descriptions. enter the Source. l Organizational Unit Represents a hierarchical entity-type structure that you can use to model your organization. or for entities that require different configurations for any of the following: time zones. team. if all task predecessor conditions have been met. enter: l l l Enter a Task Name of 80 characters or less. Questions. Task IDs must be unique within the template or schedule. work days. 3 Click Save and Close 4 See also: l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 213 .For end-user tasks. holidays.

The parameters are passed to the external application. you might use the Parameters tab to select a point of view for the grid.l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Setting Task Parameters The Parameters tab only contains data for tasks that are associated with an Integration Type and have parameters. 2 If the parameter values are not entered by the task type. 3 See also: l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Specifying Task Instructions Task owners can create a set of instructions for completing the task. if the task contains a link to a data grid. On the Parameters tab. you can set specific information about the task and how it is run. For example. ä To set task parameters: 1 From the New Task dialog box. select the Parameters tab. All other users who have access to the task are only able to read the instructions. If there are task instructions that are 214 . you may enter the required parameter values. The task waits to start until the values are provided. Integration Types provide links to external applications. Note: If the parameters are not defined when the task is ready to start. an email is sent to the task owner.

then enter the URL. select the Instructions tab. or schedule. 2 The Workflow tab contains the Assignee and Approver assignments. select the Workflow tab. 2 From the Type list. ä To add a reference: 1 In the References section. 3 See also: l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Selecting the Workflow ä To select the workflow: 1 From the New Task dialog box. ä To specify instructions: 1 From the New Task dialog box.oracle. 2 Enter the Instructions which can have unlimited characters. for example: Oracle. For template tasks. and then Add. l URL Enter a URL name. or select the Add icon. click . select one of these types: l Local File Enter a name. Enter this information for the Assignee: l Assignee—The user names available for selection as preparer are only those users authorized with the preparer role. template. select Actions.com. the Template and Task Types instructions are viewable but not editable.inherited from the Task Type. that instruction text is displayed above the instruction text box and is read-only. click Browse to select and attach the file. To select to assign an Assignee to a named user or Shared Services Group. http://www. and click OK. 215 .

in increments of 15 minutes. enter the minimum duration of a task in the form of Days. Enter the First Name and Last Name or click Search to select a backup user.For an End-User task. Note: The Assignee can be an individual user. l Backup—If you assigned a user for the primary Assignee. Enter this information for the Approver: 3 216 l Level Name l Backup l End Date See also: l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 . Click Backup . then select the time of day. you can assign a backup user authorized as an Assignee: a. and Minutes. then select the time of day. b. l l Optional: For Minimum Duration. If you do not select an Assignee. An At Risk criteria is based on the condition if the Start date was missed AND (the End_date minus the Current_date is less than the minimum task duration OR the End_Date minus the Start_Date is less than the minimum duration). group. l Starts Select a start date. in increments of 15 minutes. for the task to end. Hours. click Select Assignee to find a user. Click OK. select Allow Early Start to allow the Assignee to open the task before the scheduled start time. c. for Assignee. The At Risk tasks display in the Needs Attention Graph in the Status Chart of the Dashboard. l Ends Select an end date. Optional: For an End-User task. the owner becomes the default Assignee. Parent and automated tasks have no Assignees. for the task to start. or team.

You can also order the questions by using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. l Number 217 . select the Questions tab. 3 Enter the Question with 4000 characters or less. you may ask if a certain process was followed when completing that task.000 characters.l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Adding Task Questions Note: The Questions tab is not displayed for automated tasks or parent tasks. select a type: l Date l Date and Time l Integer l List Enter a list of valid responses to the question. When you create a task. For schedule tasks. the user must respond or they cannot submit the task for approval. Select Include Attachments if you want to include an attachments section. Number. but are not editable. Select Multi-Line Text. If you are creating or updating a task in a template. and indicate whether they are required. In templates. If a question is required. 2 Click Add. or True/False. ä To add a question: 1 From the New Task dialog box. MultiLine Text determines how many lines of text are visible without scrolling. and then enter the Number of Lines. users can respond to the questions from the Task Actions page. Rows that are locked cannot be edited or deleted because they are inherited from the Task Type. an additional column displays. You can specify various types of questions. you may want the Assignee to answer questions about their actions before they indicate a task is complete. such as Text. the Task Type questions are displayed. 4 From the Type list. showing whether the row is locked or unlocked to indicate whether the user can remove or update the questions. l Multi-Line Text The maximum length should be less than 4. For example. on the Actions dialog boxes. from 3 to 50 lines. You can specify questions on the task.

To remove a question.000.If you select Number. for example. then click Move to Top. Move Up. From the Negative Number list. Select the Thousands Separator option if you want numbers to display a thousands separator (for example. or Move to Bottom. (123). 7 Click OK. Note: The Required checkbox is disabled for Questions assigned to Owner or Viewer roles. Access is based on responsibilities. 6 If the question is required. select Required.00) From the Currency Symbol list. l Text l True or False l User l Yes or No 5 Assign a Role (Assignee. 1000. Viewer) to the question. select the question and click Delete. select a scale value for numbers. select a question. select number formatting options: m m m m m For Decimal Places. Owner. select how to display negative numbers. for example. 1. Tip: To edit a question. for example. From the Scale list. Approvers. select the question and click Edit. 8 Optional: To change the order of questions. select a currency symbol. Move Down. enter a value for the number of decimal places to display. 9 218 See also: l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 . Dollars ($).

Tip: For additional details about the user. You can set these conditions under which the predecessor relationship is established: 219 . select the user. You can specify up to ten approvers and an unlimited number of viewers. You must assign a condition to the predecessor/successor relationship.Setting Task Access The Access tab enables you to add or remove Viewers and Approvers for the current task. or Move to Bottom. Email address. then click Remove. you can choose a predecessor from another schedule. 3 Optional: To change the order of approvers. To specifically identify a user. then click Move to Top. For template tasks. It also enables you to specify the order of approvers. then click Search. ä To set task access: 1 From the New Task dialog box. Move Up. 4 See also: l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Setting Task Predecessors The Predecessors tab enables you to set predecessors for the current task. select users. such as groups and roles. A task does not need predecessor tasks as long as a start date and time is specified. the task begins when the predecessor tasks are started or complete (for Finish-to-Start) and the start date and time is reached. 2 Enter the first or last name of the user. and for schedule tasks. or Description. click Details. If both are specified. then enter a User ID. you can choose a predecessor from another template. click Advance. select the Access tab. Move Down. Tip: To remove a user from the Approvers or Viewers list.

a user can start a document summary. 2 Click Add. To refine the search. d. Start Date. 5 See also: 220 l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 . End Date. ä To set task predecessors: 1 From the New Task dialog box. Click Basic. however they can be predecessors to other types of tasks. click Add Fields and select search fields. but cannot mark it complete until the consolidated data is final. select a condition. Finish to Finish The task cannot be marked as Complete until the predecessor task is marked as complete. The task starts as soon as the predecessor task completes or finishes with warning. 3 To search for a Predecessor: a. Click OK.Note: Event Monitoring tasks can not have predecessors. 4 Select a predecessor task(s) and click OK. This is primarily used for user tasks. b. even it is in error. c. for example: Execution Type. From each of the Condition lists. Finish Error to Start The task starts as soon as the predecessor task completes. select the Predecessors tab. Condition Description Finish to Start Default. even it is in error. For example. Finish Error to Finish The task completes as soon as the predecessor task completes.

Required—Requires a value for the attribute. l Type This noneditable field is populated by the Attribute. 3 See also: Do Not Display—Does not see this attribute in any of the dashboards. The current task applies only to the West Sales Region. you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North. multiple lines of displayed text without scrolling for Multi-Line Text. a name of a person. for each of the Text Box and Attachments tabs: a. and then Add. To add an attribute. or reports. Click Add. for example: a numeric value for Formatted Number attribute. User. or Yes or No for the Yes/No attribute. l Access All roles have view access unless otherwise specified in the table below. and remove values for the attribute.” ä To apply task attributes: 1 From the Task dialog box. change.Applying Task Attributes To locate tasks in the system. you can apply attributes to the task. To add an access. b. a List for List attribute. list views. Enter: l Attribute Select an attribute from the list of defined attributes. select the Attributes tab. East. select Actions. You can later filter by the attribute value. Allow Edits—Has the ability to add. you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. When you select an attribute. and West. l Value Select a value associated with the type of attribute. so you can add the Sales Region attribute and set it to “West. l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 221 . c. Select one of the Role access types: m m m 2 Click OK. For example. but subject to the editability rules. Select a role. South.

l Rule—Name of the Rule l Conditions—The choice of what conditions must exist before running the rule . or other characteristics. or to Closed if no additional approval levels exist. ä To work with task rules: 1 From the Task dialog box. the assignee role is marked as complete. thus progressing workflow to the first approval level. This rule runs when the Assignee clicks Submit. This rule runs when the Approver clicks Approve. l l Prevent Task Approval—Prevents approval of a task based on attribute values. Available task rules: l Auto Approve Task—Automatically completes specified approvals only if specified conditions have been met. especially when. This rule runs when the Task status changes to Open with Approver. You can view the following information: 222 l Order—The order of precedence. because a rule is unique to a task. the specified approver levels are marked as complete. l Auto Submit Task—Automatically submits a task if specified conditions are met. or to Closed if no approval levels exist. double-click a task. 2 Select the Rules tab.l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Working With Task Rules” on page 222 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Working With Task Rules Task rules affect task behavior. This rule runs when the Task status changes from Pending to Open with Assignee. or Task Type level. Schedule. assigning rules isn’t appropriate at the Template. Prevent Task Submission—Prevents submission of a task based on attribute values. When conditions are satisfied. or other characteristics. These rules enable users to assign rules directly to tasks. Examples of conditions that could apply to this rule include: l Attributes have specified values (including calculated attributes) l Predecessor task contains an attribute with a specified value When conditions are satisfied. thus progressing workflow to the next approval level. These rules apply to the Tasks for which the rules were configured.

on the Rules tab. The filter selected and configured for the rule determines the conditions that trigger the rule to apply. The information on this tab is read-only.3 To edit a rule. click Edit and update: l Rule—Select a rule. created. and the date on which the change was made. Create Filter—The Condition section is enabled. Explain why you configured the rule and how should be used. the old and new values. l Approver Level—Select the rule for all levels or select the Approver levels l l Select Create Filter and populate the conditions section or select Use Saved Filter. or changed. the user who made the change. the system retains a history of the changes made to it. for example. 3 When you finish. a shift in dates or change in ownership. modification type such as added.Specify on which task the conditions should be selected: Current Task. Any Predecessor. See also: l “Setting Task Properties” on page 212 l “Setting Task Parameters” on page 214 l “Specifying Task Instructions” on page 214 l “Selecting the Workflow” on page 215 l “Adding Task Questions” on page 217 l “Setting Task Access” on page 219 l “Setting Task Predecessors” on page 219 l “Applying Task Attributes” on page 221 l “Viewing Task History” on page 223 Viewing Task History For each task. click Save and Close. ä To view task history: 1 From the Task dialog box. Operand. l 4 Filter Task . Conjunction. 223 . l Description—Optional. Specific Task (Provide the Task ID). 2 Select a task. and then select a filter. Conditions—Select one: m m Use Saved Filter—The Condition section displays a read-only version of the conditions associated with the saved filter. Attribute. Source. select the History tab. and Value behave as they do for the existing advanced filter feature. Each change record includes the field.

The purpose of aborting a task (instead of performing a forced close) is to prevent successors from continuing and to keep the process moving. and then Abort. double-click a task. 2 The Properties tab lists the following fields: l Task ID l Status l Schedule Name l Start and End Dates l Duration l Priority l Organizational Unit l Owner and Assignee l Task Type l Actual Start and End dates l Actual Duration l Parameters Lists the Cluster. click Actions. and then Create Comment or Delete Comment. click Approve or Reject. click Actions. and then Import. 6 Click Close. click Actions. 4 To create or delete a comment. 3 Select an Import Type: 224 . l The History tab captures an audit trail of changes to the task. Importing and Exporting Tasks ä To import tasks: 1 From a task.Working with the Task Dialog Box ä To view the Task dialog box: 1 On the Task List. and Journal Action Type. l Comments l Workflow l The Alerts and Related Tasks tabs display the current alerts and related tasks. 5 To abort. Application. 3 To approve or reject a task. 2 Click Browse to find the import file. Journal Name.

Assignee. Date Format Select a Date Format from the drop-down list of allowed date formats. if the import file has only a column for a task instructions. click Cancel. or Save File. click Actions. By default. yyyy Click Import. and then select Export. It does not affect other tasks in the schedule that are not specified in the import file. reassigned Owners. for example. the task name. 4 Select Open with Microsoft Office Excel (default) or select another program to open the file. Date formats are not translated. 2 Select export options: l l For Rows: Select All Tasks or Selected Tasks For Format: Select Formatted data (visible columns only) or Unformatted data for future import 3 Click Export. 225 . or removed some attributes and added new attributes. You might also have made the same change to a large number of tasks. in the import file. Only details for the task properties specified in the file are updated. adding a new attribute to 100 of 400 tasks. The update option is not a full replacement of the task details. For example.l l 4 Replace—Replaces the definition of a task with the definition in the import file. For example: 5 l MM/dd/yyyy l dd/MM/yyyy l dd-MMM-yy l MMM d. and other properties are not affected. ä To export tasks: 1 From a task. 5 Click OK. attributes. Update—Updates partial information for tasks. you might have made changes to task instructions. If you do not want to overwrite the task. Note: The system displays a warning that tasks in a schedule that match a task ID in the import file will be modified. For example. and Approvers. Assignees. the date format is set to the locale date format of the exported file location. This option replaces the task detail with the detail that is in the file that you are importing.

you cannot edit the start date. attributes. or Duration. Sorting Tasks From the Task List. and then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. 2 Right-click on the task and select Actions. select Actions. you can edit a task description. or approver. for example: a numeric value for Formatted Number attribute. Start or End Date. 3 To edit task attributes: Select the Attributes tab. 2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display. You can only change the duration or the end date. delete. or end date. a List for List attribute. l Type This noneditable field is populated by the Attribute. and then Add. ä To sort tasks: 1 Open a task list. For example. l Value Select a value associated with the type of attribute. a name of a person. or Yes or No for the Yes/No attribute. multiple lines of displayed text without scrolling for Multi-Line Text. You also cannot edit instructions. 226 . Owner. you can sort tasks by ascending or descending order. Assignee. Enter: l Attribute Select an attribute from the list of defined attributes. and you cannot add.Editing Tasks You can edit tasks depending on their status and your security rights. To add an attribute. and then Edit. or edit predecessors. because the task has started. User. 4 Click Save and Close. You can sort by Schedule Name. For an Open task in a Task List. ä To edit a task: 1 Select the task that you want to edit. You can reassign the Assignee or approver from the Task Actions workflow. Status. questions.

ä To move a task: 1 Select a task. copy. expand Task Find. 3 Navigate to the target destination for the task and click OK. If you paste a task onto a child task. If you paste a task onto a parent task. 2 Enter a task name in the search field. ä To search for a task: 1 From the left pane. and paste the task. the pasted task becomes a sibling of the child task. Note: Cut. or paste a task: 1 Select a task. 227 . 3 Click Previous or Next to find the previous or next task that matches the search criteria. the Task Details dialog box opens and enables you to modify the task that you are pasting. When you paste a task. For example. You can scroll through the results using the Previous and Next buttons. You can copy a task from one schedule or template and paste it into another. you can move tasks to a different day. Moving Tasks You can use views to move tasks. you can copy a task from one day in the calendar and paste it to another. You can search using full or partial words. 2 Right-click on the task and select an action. For example. and click Find Task. or from the main toolbar. in the Calendar view. l Select Copy to copy the task and store it on the clipboard. ä To cut. you might enter “load” to find load tasks. in the Calendar view. Copying. Cutting. or cut. click a toolbar button: l Select Cut to cut the task and store it on the clipboard. copy. The Cut function is not available for scheduled (open or closed) tasks. the pasted task becomes a child of the parent task.Searching for Tasks You can use the Task Find feature to find specific tasks. Copy. For example. 2 Right-click on the task and drag it to a new location. and Paste features are not available for parent tasks. and Pasting Tasks You can use views to cut and copy tasks in templates and schedules.

b. Select the successor tasks. Choose one: m m l If there are predecessors. . press Ctrl for random selection or press Shift while you click the first and last row in a range. The task is inserted and the views and filter views are refreshed to display the pasted task. The Task Details dialog box is now editable. The successor list is displayed.3 Right-click on the task. otherwise. 2 228 Do one: l Right-click and select Submit.Tasks will open in original order. 2 On the Task Details dialog box. select Submit from the Status list. The task details dialog box closes and the task reopens based on your selections. The Task Details dialog box opens and enables you to make changes to the task that you are pasting. 4 Click OK to close.All tasks will re-open immediately. select Paste. Ignore predecessor relationships . To multiselect. add or delete predecessors and then click Save and Close. then select Paste. 4 Click OK to complete the paste operation. or from the main menu toolbar. Click OK. Select Re-Open Successor Tasks. Designate relationships: l Designate predecessor tasks. 3 On the Predecessors tab. Submitting Tasks ä To submit tasks: 1 Select the tasks that you need to submit. l Actions menu: Click Submit. ä To reopen a task: 1 Select a closed task and double-click it. Reopening Tasks You can reopen tasks and choose to reestablish the predecessor and successor relationships. click Reopen. click Cancel. then you can choose this option: Re-establish predecessor relationships . The Confirmation dialog box is displayed. l Actions panel: From Set Status. Designate successor tasks: a.

4 Click on a task to open the Task Actions dialog box. 6 Enter or click Search to find the reassignment. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. l Selected Tasks l Selected and Future Tasks Enter a Justification for the reassignment. 7 Select what tasks to reassign: 8 . 2 Do one: l Right-click and select Approve or Reject.Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. workflow users (Assignees and Approvers) can request reassignment of their workflow role for a single task. select Task List. and click OK Approving or Rejecting Tasks ä To approve or reject tasks: 1 Select the tasks that you need to submit. select Approve or Reject. From the Task Actions dialog box. 229 . Administrators and schedule/template Owners can reassign the task using the Edit Task dialog box without requiring approval. These requests require approval. and click OK Managing Task Reassignments You can use the Actions panel to work on multiple tasks simultaneously. 5 Click the Actions menu and select Request Reassignment. click Close Manager. To multiselect. 3 Review any errors. 3 Review any errors. ä To request a reassignment: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. l Actions menu: Click Approve or Reject. press Ctrl for random selection or press Shift while you click the first and last row in a range. l Actions panel: From Set Status. 3 From Dashboards.

In schedules. Deleting Tasks You can delete tasks that you no longer need. you can choose to delete just the parent. Aborting Tasks The purpose of aborting a task (instead of performing a forced close) is to prevent successors from continuing and to keep the process moving: l l 230 When a Finish-to-Start or Finish-Error-to-Start predecessor is aborted. you must have Service Administrator or Power User security rights. or from the main toolbar. the task owner/schedule owner/close administrator must force a close of the successor. ä To delete a task: 1 Select the task that you want to delete. To keep the process moving. click the Delete button. .9 Click OK and then Close on Task Actions. 2 Right-click on the task and select Delete. click Yes. to keep the process moving. To delete a task. 3 At the delete confirmation prompt. you must edit the successors to remove the aborted predecessor and to start the successors. or the parent and its children. you can delete only tasks that have a status of Pending. You cannot delete tasks that have a status of Open or Closed. its successors remain as Pending. If you delete a parent task. When a Finish-to-Finish or Finish-Error-to-Finish predecessor is aborted.

................................ 245 Viewing Schedules ....................... After a schedule is set to Locked...................................... 245 Locking Schedules .......................................................... 231 Setting Required Task Parameters .................................................................... 247 A schedule defines a chronologically ordered set of tasks that must be executed for a specific close period........ you can apply the Quarterly Close template to the Calendar as Q116 Close Schedule for the first Quarter............ 242 Setting Schedule Status......................................................................................................................................................... its status cannot be changed...................... Manually Creating Schedules To create a schedule.................................. and is the application of a template into the calendar............. then apply the template again as Q216 Close for the second quarter.......................................... 237 Editing Schedules............ A Power User can run Create Schedule on a template or select New from Manage Schedules................... 241 Authorizing System-Automated Tasks............................................ For example................ or Locked......................................... You can change the status of a schedule from Pending to Open.................................. 245 Searching for Schedules ......................... Schedules have a status of Pending........................................ 238 Importing Tasks into Schedules ......................................... Closed...................... you must be an Administrator or Power User..... 237 Opening Schedules ................................................................................................... it cannot be reset to Pending.......................................... 246 Deleting Schedules . 239 Updating Tasks in Schedules ......................... Open................................................................. or from Open to Closed or Locked............................... 243 Viewing Schedule History................. Note: After a schedule is set to Open..............14 Managing Close Schedules In This Chapter Manually Creating Schedules .................................................................................. You can manually define a 231 ............................................... 240 Reassigning Users ........................ 244 Validating Schedules .. 238 Adding Tasks to Schedules ................................................

description. The schedule owner must be an Administrator or Power User. click New.schedule from the Manage Schedules page. all values are inherited from the template definition. When you create a schedule from a template. you can add tasks with dates earlier or later and the properties are updated to reflect the earliest and latest dates. 4 From the Manage Schedules page. ä To manually create a schedule: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. after the schedule is created. The default owner is the current user. start and end dates. click Close Manager. 3 Select Manage. and owners for schedules. ä To set schedule properties: 1 232 Create a new schedule and select the Properties tab: l Name l Description l Organizational Unit l Start Date—Starting date for the schedule l End Date—Ending date for the schedule l Year l Period l Day Zero Date—The date to assign as day zero l For Owner. . and then select Schedules. or create a schedule from a template. however. l “Setting Schedule Properties” on page 232 l “Adding Instructions to Schedules” on page 233 l “Assigning Schedule Viewers” on page 234 l “Applying Schedule Attributes” on page 234 l “Adding Day Labels” on page 235 l “Working With Schedule Rules” on page 235 l “Viewing Schedule History” on page 237 Setting Schedule Properties The Properties tab enables you to set the name. use the default owner or click Select Owner . 5 Enter schedule information on the schedule tabs: . The start and end dates specify the initial date range for the schedule.

click Browse to select and attach the file. In the References section.com. l Template Name 2 To save and close.oracle. for example: Oracle. ä To add instructions to a schedule: 1 Create a new schedule and select the Instructions tab. and click OK. and click OK. which are then inherited by all tasks in the schedule. click OK or click the another tab. http:// www. 4 To save and close. Click Add. From the Type list. select one of these types: l Local File Enter a name. 3 Enter schedule information on the schedule tabs: l “Adding Instructions to Schedules” on page 233 l “Assigning Schedule Viewers” on page 234 l “Applying Schedule Attributes” on page 234 l “Adding Day Labels” on page 235 l “Working With Schedule Rules” on page 235 l “Viewing Schedule History” on page 237 Adding Instructions to Schedules You can specify instructions and supporting documents for a schedule. enter instructions for the schedule. b.l Status Note: The schedule status is initially set to Pending and is display only. click OK or click the Viewers tab. 2 In Instructions. 5 Enter schedule information on the schedule tabs: l “Setting Schedule Properties” on page 232 l “Assigning Schedule Viewers” on page 234 l “Applying Schedule Attributes” on page 234 l “Adding Day Labels” on page 235 l “Working With Schedule Rules” on page 235 233 . then enter the URL. 3 To add a reference: a. l URL Enter a URL name. all entries are saved. all entries are saved.

The current schedule applies only to the West Sales Region. Viewers receive read-only access to all tasks in the schedule. then enter a User ID. select users. select users. You can later filter by the attribute value. click Advanced. then click Search. Tip: To remove users. click Details. or Description. so you can add the Sales Region attribute and set it to “West. however they must have the product security roles. then click Remove or Remove All. or part of the name. 7 For additional details about the user. 6 From the Search Results list. such as groups and roles. 3 To search by users or groups. you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. 8 Click Add or Add All to move users to the Selected list. then select Users. 5 To identify a user. 10 Enter schedule information on the schedule tabs: l “Setting Schedule Properties” on page 232 l “Adding Instructions to Schedules” on page 233 l “Applying Schedule Attributes” on page 234 l “Adding Day Labels” on page 235 l “Working With Schedule Rules” on page 235 l “Viewing Schedule History” on page 237 Applying Schedule Attributes To locate schedules in the system. 4 Enter a user name. ä To assign viewer rights: 1 Create a new schedule and select the Viewers tab. East. 9 To save and close. When you select an attribute.l “Viewing Schedule History” on page 237 Assigning Schedule Viewers The Viewers tab enables you to assign viewer rights for schedules. 2 Click Add. click the Search Users button. South.” 234 . you can apply attributes to the schedule. you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North. click OK or click the Attributes tab. Email address. Groups. For example. all entries are saved. A schedule can have multiple viewers. and West. or Teams.

2 Add a day label to a specific date. Rules configured in the Schedule dialog box are copied to new schedule tasks. click OK or click the History tab. select a value for the attribute from a drop-down list. ä To add a day label to a schedule: 1 Create a new schedule and select the Day Labels tab. 235 . Labels can mark a milestone day or specify the purpose of the day. 6 Enter schedule information on the schedule tabs: l “Setting Schedule Properties” on page 232 l “Adding Instructions to Schedules” on page 233 l “Assigning Schedule Viewers” on page 234 l “Adding Day Labels” on page 235 l “Working With Schedule Rules” on page 235 l “Viewing Schedule History” on page 237 Adding Day Labels You use business day labels in the closing activity for a calendar day. all entries are saved. 5 To save and close. When you add Day Labels to a template. 4 Enter schedule information on the schedule tabs: l “Setting Schedule Properties” on page 232 l “Adding Instructions to Schedules” on page 233 l “Assigning Schedule Viewers” on page 234 l “Applying Schedule Attributes” on page 234 l “Working With Schedule Rules” on page 235 l “Viewing Schedule History” on page 237 Working With Schedule Rules Schedule rules apply to all tasks in the schedule and thus apply rules to groups of tasks. select an attribute. 3 To save and close. click OK or click the Day Labels tab. or enter a value. they are copied to schedules created from the template. all entries are saved. 2 Click Add. 4 For Value. depending on the attribute.ä To apply an attribute: 1 Create a new schedule and select the Attributes tab. 3 From the Attribute list.

Conjunction. Example of conditions that could apply to this rule include: Attributes have specified values (including calculated attributes). Prevent Task Submission—Prevents submission of a task based on attribute values. 3 Select the Rules tab. Any Predecessor. or closes if no additional approval levels exist. Explain why you configured the rule and how should be used. l 236 Filter Task—Specify on which task the conditions should be selected: Current Task. or closes if no Approval levels exist. . When conditions are satisfied. l l Prevent Task Approval—Prevents approval of a task based on attribute values. or select Use Saved Filter. 2 Double-click a schedule. click Edit and update: l Rule—Select a rule. Attribute. and Value behave as they do for the existing advanced filter feature. Conditions—Select one: m m Use Saved Filter—The Condition section displays a read-only version of the conditions associated with the saved file. The filter selected and configured for the rule determines the conditions that trigger the rule to apply. on the Rules tab. and then select Schedules. Operand. or other characteristics. l Rule—Name of the Rule l Conditions—The choice of what conditions must exist before running the rule To edit a rule. You can view the following information: 4 l Order—The order of precedence. the Assignee role is marked complete. and then select a filter. l Approver Level—Select the rule for all levels or select the Approver levels. Create Filter—The Condition section is enabled. or other characteristics. Source. and workflow progresses to the next approval level.Available schedule rules: l Auto Approve Task—Automatically completes specified approvals only if specified conditions have been met. the specified approver levels are marked complete. l Description—Optional. Specific Task (Provide the Task ID). l l Select Create Filter and populate the conditions section. l Auto Submit Task—Automatically submits a task if specified conditions are met. and workflow progresses to the first Approval level. When conditions are satisfied. ä To view schedule rules: 1 Select Manage.

You can view these fields: 4 l Field—Lists the field involved l Modification Type—Indicates the type of change: Created. 237 . the task shows up in views under Needs Attention. then an email notification is sent to the task owner and to all members of the group or team. ä To open a schedule: 1 Click the Navigator icon . You open schedules from the Manage Schedules dialog box. or work on tasks. edit. Added. In addition. Setting Required Task Parameters The task is in a pending state until the required parameters are filled in. 3 Select the History tab. and then select Schedules. If they are not filled in before the specified start date. Opening Schedules You open schedules to add. 2 Double-click a schedule. Removed l Modified On—Date of the modification l Modified By—User name who modified the field l Old Value l New Value Click OK. Changed. ä To view schedule history: 1 Select Manage. After the required parameters are filled in. the task starts.5 Enter schedule information on the schedule tabs: l “Setting Schedule Properties” on page 232 l “Adding Instructions to Schedules” on page 233 l “Assigning Schedule Viewers” on page 234 l “Applying Schedule Attributes” on page 234 l “Adding Day Labels” on page 235 l “Viewing Schedule History” on page 237 Viewing Schedule History The History tab captures an audit trail of changes to schedules.

and then Open. ä To add a task to a schedule: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. click Close Manager. such as Calendar-Month. and then Edit. ä To edit a schedule: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. and then select Schedules. or delete tasks in a Closed or Locked schedule. You cannot add tasks to a Closed or Locked schedule. You can make changes to an Open or Pending schedule to modify pending tasks. click Close Manager. To edit a schedule. 5 Select Actions. 7 Click OK. such as the name or the schedule or the start and end dates. 238 . You cannot add. 4 Open a schedule in a view. 3 Select Manage. 3 From Manage Schedules. click Close Manager. l Right-click and select Open. . or select the Edit icon. 4 Select a schedule to edit. and then select Schedules. or the end date to a date earlier than the last task in the schedule. You cannot change the start date to a date later than the first task in the schedule. change. l Click the Open icon. select a schedule. Adding Tasks to Schedules You can add tasks to a schedule if it is Pending or Open. you must be the schedule owner or an Administrator. 6 Edit the schedule. 3 Select Manage. . 4 Use one of these methods: l Select Actions. 5 Add tasks. Editing Schedules You can edit schedules to change the properties.2 Under Administer.

reassigned Owners. adding a new attribute to 100 of 400 tasks. for example. By default. the date format is set to the local date format of the exported file location. if you have a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet with task definitions. it is reset to Open with Assignee status. Assignees. ä To import tasks into a schedule: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. and then select Schedules. For example. if the import file has only a column for a task instructions.Importing Tasks into Schedules You can import tasks. Assignee. 4 Click Import Tasks. the task name. Approver. or an error occurs. you might have made changes to task instructions. or click Browse to find the file. If you import information on an End-User task that has started running. 5 Enter the name of the file to import. or removed some attributes and added new attributes. and other properties are not affected. 7 Date Format Select a Date Format from the drop-down list of allowed date formats. Replace—Replaces the definition of a task with the definition in the import file. Only details for the task properties specified in the file are updated. attributes. and Approvers. Date formats are not translated. and the answers to questions are cleared. For example. remove the Owner. Assignee. click Close Manager. You might also have made the same change to a large number of tasks. from text files into a schedule with a status of Pending or Open. and Start Date and Time fields from the import file. rather than creating individual new tasks. You cannot import tasks into schedules that have a Closed or Locked status. The update option is not a full replacement of the task details. click Cancel. It does not affect other tasks in the schedule that are not specified in the import file. or partial task data. For example. This option replaces the task detail with the detail that is in the file that you are importing. 239 . in the import file. Update—Updates partial information for tasks. you can save the file as a CSV file. then import it into a schedule. 3 Select Manage. Note: The system displays a warning that tasks in the schedule that match a task ID in the import file will be modified. Note: Before you import a file to a schedule using the Update option for a closed task. You can also use the Import feature to quickly add many repetitive tasks by editing the fields in a CSV file and importing it. 6 Select an import option: l l . If you do not want to overwrite the task.

View the errors. yyyy Click Import. If you make changes. and the total number of tasks imported. previous answers to questions are cleared. ä To update tasks in a schedule: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Click OK. click Close Manager. You can reopen the tasks to rerun the process. You may also need to restart System-Automated tasks if they end in error. it is reset to the Assignee. Closed/Error From Task Details. When you save the task. For example. and in this case. and the Import Errors dialog box displays the errors. If errors are found. When you save the task. the task owner can click Reopen to reopen the task and make changes. it is reset to the Assignee. From Task Details. the task owner can click Reopen to reopen the task and make changes. or Question sections. the task owner can click Reopen to reopen the task and make changes. the web service runs again. When you save the task. it is reset to Open with Assignee status. and you can edit the information. you can change the instructions and references. or Question sections. and the answers to questions are cleared. indicating the schedule name. Attribute. the “Import Success” dialog box is displayed. Approver must reject the task. the name of the file containing the tasks. When you reopen a task.For example: 8 l MM/dd/yyyy l dd/MM/yyyy l dd-MMM-yy l MMM d. When you save the task. you can reopen it. and the answers to questions are cleared. Attribute. Updating Tasks in Schedules You may need to periodically manually update information on a task that is running. and questions. the import process is not run. which sets it to Error status. . 240 . With Approver You can edit or import data in to the Instruction. Reopening a series of tasks does not reestablish the predecessor relationships. l l If the import is successful. All end-user tasks are reset to Open with Assignee. You can reopen tasks under these conditions: Table 42 Conditions for Reopening Tasks Task Status End-User System-Automated With Assignee/ Running You can edit or import data into the Instruction. the web service runs again. When you save the task. No tasks are reverted to Pending status. attributes. then click OK to return to Manage Schedules. No updates are allowed to running system-automated tasks. From Task Details. it is reset to the Assignee.

You can use the Reassign feature in the Manage Schedules dialog box to automatically change assignments instead of manually searching for. 7 For Replace with. click Find User and enter search criteria for the user to whom you want to reassign tasks: a. enter the first or last name for the user. l For an Error task. 8 Select the Ending Between dates. and then select View. click Yes to continue or No to cancel. however. and click Search. b. and editing individual schedules. and click Search. and then Reassign User.3 Select Manage. right-click. click Find User and enter search criteria for the user that you want to replace: . From the Select User dialog box. then click OK. 4 Open a schedule. and then Schedules. The View Task dialog box is displayed. 6 For Find User. b. enter the first or last name for the user. click Close. Reassigning Users You may periodically need to reassign users to different schedules. From the Select User dialog box. 3 Select Manage. then click OK. 8 If the system displays a warning that the Assignee must complete the task again. 7 Edit the task. 4 Select a schedules in which you want to reassign users. 5 Select a task with a Closed or Error status. click Save and Close. opening. Select the user from the results. or that the service will be executed again. later that employee leaves the company and another employee assumes those schedules. click Close Manager. For example. and then select Schedules. 5 Select Actions. ä To reassign users: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. you may create a schedule and assign a user to certain rights. 241 . 9 Perform an action: l For a Closed task. Select the user from the results. 6 Click Reopen. a. The Reassign feature enables you to quickly find the schedules associated with one user and reassign them to another.

When the process ends. only the RunAs ID can authorize the task. If the parameters of a task are modified by a user other than the Assignee (or task owner if the owner is also the Assignee). you specify a user account under which the task is run. If an owner or Assignee edits the task. the system automatically issues a request for authorization if it has not been completed. A user who receives a request for authorization can access the Authorization dialog box from a link in the email or by logging on to the application. the task details indicate that authorization is required. ä To authorize a task: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.Success” message that indicates that the user reassignment is complete. you may require authorization to perform the task if any of these conditions occurs: l l l If you add a System-Automated task with an alternate runtime user known as the RunAs ID to a schedule. 4 Select a schedule. 242 . To preserve security. and its status changes to Needs Attention. 3 Select Manage. and then select Schedules. from a template or by manually adding the task When you set a schedule to Open status. When the System-Automated task is scheduled to run. for security purposes. click Close Manager. the task is not run. In this case. Authorizing System-Automated Tasks When you create tasks or Task Types for System-Automated tasks. the authorization is reset to unauthorized and must be obtained by entering a password. the system displays a “Reassign Users . if authorization is not provided. An administrator who knows the credentials of the runtime user can perform the authorization or issue a request to the user to obtain authorization.9 Select roles for the user that must be reassigned: l Owner l Assignee l Approver l Viewer 10 Click Reassign. . and displays the schedule name and total number of user reassignments made. Authorization ensures that the user performing the System-Automated task has security privileges for the application and data for which the task runs.

the system prompts you for the user password. or Locked. Select tasks and click Authorize to authorize them. Status for tasks that have met their starting condition are set to Open. and task notifications are sent to their Assignees. b.5 Select Actions. Closed. 9 If you select a user other than yourself. or delete tasks. These are the available statuses: l l l l Pending—The schedule is not yet active. Locked—The schedule is locked and cannot be modified. If you know the user password. This is the default status of the schedule when it is created. Tasks in the schedule continue to proceed based on their definitions. 6 From the user selection list. click Send Authorization Request. 8 To view task details. or select the Authorize Tasks icon. The list of unauthorized tasks is displayed. If you do not know the user password and must request authorization from the user. Setting Schedule Status You manage the schedule lifecycle by setting the schedule status. To set schedule status. A locked schedule cannot be set back to Open status and cannot be edited. The system displays a Users selection list and a table of unauthorized tasks for the selected schedule. enter it. 7 Select a task that needs authorization. Your user name displays first on the list in bold by default. When the schedule is opened. Open—The schedule is open for work to be performed. you must the schedule owner or Service Administrator. The user selection list is populated with users that have pending SystemAutomated tasks assigned to them that require authorization. Tip: To contact the task owner by email. The system displays a list of unauthorized tasks for that user. edit. Closed—The schedule is no longer active but follow-up work may be required. select a user. a. Tasks in the schedule can be run. which sends an email to that user. To run a schedule. click a task name and review the task parameters. click the Owner name next to the task and view the user details. 243 . it has a status of Pending by default so that you can make final adjustments to it. tasks begin to execute according to their definition. which changes its status to Open. and add. the list is blank. You can set the status of a schedule to Open. and then Authorize Tasks. depending on its current status. you change the status from Pending to Open. It can be viewed and deleted. Schedule owners or administrators can reopen a Closed schedule. which removes them from the list. When you create a schedule. If you have no unauthorized tasks. but you cannot add tasks to the schedule.

Note: If a schedule task start time is reached and authorization has not been provided for a

system-automated task, the task remains in the Pending status and requires authorization.
When work on the schedule has reached a stage when follow-up work is all that is required, you
set the status to Closed. You cannot add new tasks to a Closed schedule, however users can
continue to work on tasks that are not complete. You can reopen a closed schedule, which
changes its status to Open.
When all close tasks are completed, you set the status to Locked. You cannot edit a Locked
schedule, or set it back to Open.

ä To set schedule status:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Select Manage, and then select Schedules.

4

Select a schedule for which to set status.

5

Select Actions, and then Set Status, or select the Set Status dropdown.

6

Click one of these status options, depending on the current status:
l

Open

l

Closed

l

Locked

.

Viewing Schedule History
The system maintains a history of schedule actions, which you can view from the Manage
Schedules dialog box. The History tab displays the components that were updated, the
modification type, the old and new values, the user who made the modification, and the change
date. The information on this tab is read-only.

ä To view a schedule history:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Select Manage, and then select Schedules.

4

Select a schedule.

5

Perform one of these actions:

6

244

.

l

If the schedule status is Pending or Open, select Actions, and then Edit.

l

If the schedule status is Closed or Locked, select Actions, and then Properties.

Select the History tab and review the schedule history.

7

When you finish, click OK.

Validating Schedules
You can validate schedules with a status of Pending or Open. Validating a schedule checks for
problems with start and end dates, predecessor relationships, parent-child relationships, and
missing task parameters for product integrations. You cannot change a schedule status from
Pending to Open until all validation errors are resolved. To validate schedules, you must the
schedule owner or Service Administrator.

ä To validate a schedule:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Select Manage, and then select Schedules.

4

Select a schedule to validate.

5

Select Actions, and then Validate, or select the Validate icon.

.

l

If there are no errors, the system displays a Schedule Valid success message.

l

If errors exist, the system displays a list.

Locking Schedules
You can lock a schedule to prevent users from making further changes.

ä To lock a schedule:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Select Manage, and then select Schedules.

4

From the list of schedules, select a schedule.

5

Select Actions, and then Set Status, or from the Set Status dropdown, select Locked.

6

Click Close.

.

Viewing Schedules
In Manage Schedules, you can specify which columns to display for the list of schedules, or show
all. You can also reorder columns, sort columns by ascending or descending order, or change
the column widths.

245

ä To display columns:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Select Manage, and then select Schedules.

4

Do one or more of the following tasks:
l

l

l

l

l

.

To display all columns, select View, then Columns, and then select Show All.
To display specific columns, select View, then Columns, and select or deselect the column
names.
To reorder columns, select View, and then Reorder Columns, select columns and use the
Up or Down arrows or drag them to change the order.
To sort columns, hover over a column header until the Sort icons are displayed, and
then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending.
To change column widths, hover over the column header dividers until the arrows
display, and drag the columns to the desired width.

Searching for Schedules
You can use the Manage Schedules dialog box to quickly find schedules. You can enter full or
partial names on which to search. You can search on additional fields such as Start Date and
Owner.

ä To search for a schedule:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Select Manage, and then select Schedules.

4

Click the > sign to expand the Search box.

5

Enter full or partial search criteria for the schedule.

6

Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains, Starts with, Ends with), click Advanced,
and enter search criteria.

.

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria.

7

Click Search.
Tip: To reset the list to display all schedules, click Reset.

246

Deleting Schedules
You can delete a schedule that you no longer need. To delete a schedule, you must be the schedule
owner or Service Administrator. Deleting a schedule removes it and all references to it from the
system.

ä To delete a schedule:
1

Click the Navigator icon

2

Under Administer, click Close Manager.

3

Select Manage, and then select Schedules.

4

From Manage Schedules, select the schedule that you want to delete.

5

Click Delete.

6

At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.

.

247

248

................................................................................................................ 250 Managing Dimension Attributes in Supplemental Data Manager ...15 Managing Supplemental Data In This Chapter Process Overview.................................... Sets up metadata information referenced in a data set......... 263 Deleting Form Templates ........... 272 Managing Data Collection Workflow ....... Note: Users can input or calculate an attribute....................... 261 Viewing Data Set History ............... l Assigns workflow and access for each data form template................. 262 Deleting Data Set Attributes ............... dimension definition and members..... The Power User defines the data set: l Creates data sets.............................. 270 Duplicating Form Templates ................... 255 Adding Data Set Attributes................... and calculation and validation rules for the attributes......................................... attributes................................... The Administrator or Power User completes the required setup procedures: l l Sets up users........................................ 2.............. 273 Process Overview Data management requires these steps: 1................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 262 Deleting Data Sets ....................................... 263 Creating Supplemental Data Manager Form Templates.................................................................................................................... 252 Working with Data Sets........ 271 Un-Deploying a Form Template to a Data Collection Period ................................................. for example.................. 255 Creating Data Sets....................................... 262 Editing Data Sets ... 271 Deploying a Form Template to a Data Collection Period .................. 256 Importing List Attributes .......................................................................... 249 ...................... 249 Supplemental Data Views....................................................................................................... l Creates additional Data Form Templates.................................................................

and forms are created in the system. The Preparer or Approver groups and filters data to focus on certain data segments. 8. 6. then the form instances are in pending status. data sets. The User views the summarized data after data is approved (depends on workflow option) and posts data. and to print or export to Excel for ad-hoc reporting. and opens a Period to start the data collection process. 9. making it easy to view and filter the information. to provide drill-down capabilities to record details. l 250 Workflow . The Administrator opens the Period after dimensions. Sends email alerts to assigned users for their related data forms. l Performs validation and ensure correctness of data. The Approver reviews and approves or rejects the data (may have multiple levels of approval). 7. m If the period is open.l l Deploys the form template to a specific data collection period to be ready for the collection process. Supplemental Data Dashboard Views You can focus on key statistics and record sets by configuring dashboards. The Administrator closes and locks the period for the data collection: l Closes Period for Data Collection (prevent additional form instances to start) l Locks Period for Data Collection (no more changes) Supplemental Data Views Subtopics l l l Supplemental Data Dashboard Views Available View Actions Displaying Column Attributes in Supplemental Data Views Use dashboards and views to present records for onscreen viewing. m If the period is not open. 4. then the form instance is active and available for data entry. l Data Set Contains the details of the selected data set. The Administrator or Power User sends email alerts to assigned users for their related data forms. 3. l Submits data for approval. The Preparer loads the data: l Loads data manually or uses a CSV file for each form data or web UI. 5.

Available View Actions From the dashboard. right-click and select a dashboard. You can also reorder and sort attributes. l Change View: Click a toolbar button to change the view type. select Data Set Dashboard. Displaying Column Attributes in Supplemental Data Views You can specify which attributes to display in a view.. and change attribute widths. Close are on the upper right corner. To open the Attribute Selection dialog where you can select and move the attributes order. Working with Supplemental Data Dashboards ä To select a dashboard: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Maximize. 5 To view or hide column attributes. or Workflow Dashboard.The Workflow contains all the forms to which the user has access. and reorder parts of the view. The Information Panel at the bottom of the screen updates to display the record details. 3 From Quick Links. click View and select the attributes. Restore—Right-click on the buttons in the minimized area. 251 . 4 On an empty space. Right-click: Displays a context-sensitive menu that enables you to perform certain actions. Maximize—Maximized portlets are expanded to fill the portlet region and all other portlets are minimized. m m m l . The portlets are swapped.. Close. l Refresh—Right-click and select Refresh to update the portlet data. hide. you can perform these actions: l l Left-click: Highlights the record. l View: Show. click Show More. Change widths by dragging. 6 Change the portlet state: l Minimize. Minimize—Minimized portlets are represented by buttons in the minimized area. l Move—Drag a portlet to another portlet area. click Supplemental Data. l Columns: Sort columns by ascending or descending order. represented by buttons in the minimized area. and then select Restore to resize. Menu contents depend on the status and security role.

4 Click Attributes. then click Actions. 4 Select a dimension. select View. click Supplemental Data. 3 From Quick Links. select Dimensions. and then Edit. click Actions. . To reorder columns. 5 On the Attributes tab. select columns and use the Up or Down arrows or drag them to change the order. To change column widths. hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display. or Workflow Dashboard. and then select Show All. then Columns.ä To display columns: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. To sort columns. and drag the columns to the desired width. select Data Set Dashboard. then New. and then Reorder Columns. To display specific columns. select View. select View. Managing Dimension Attributes in Supplemental Data Manager Subtopics l l l Adding Dimension Attributes Editing Dimension Attributes Deleting Dimension Attributes Adding Dimension Attributes ä To add dimension attributes: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. and select or deselect the column names. hover over a column header until the Sort icons are displayed. then Columns. 3 From Quick Links. click Supplemental Data. Enter the following: 252 l Name l Description . and then Add Attribute. and then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. 5 Do one or more of the following tasks: l l l l l . To display all columns.

7 In Update Dimension.l Key Attribute Select Key Attribute if this attribute is the key attribute. o o o o l For Decimal Places. select Key Attribute. click Import or Export. for example. which you can override. Number If you select Number. The system displays the thousands separator symbol for the user locale. o To import or export list items from a CSV file. 1. enter a value for the number of decimal places to be displayed. to select the new attribute as a “Key Attribute” for the dimension.00). select formatting options (The defaults are set in the Preferences section of the System Settings). 6 Click OK. Select Display as Percentage to display a percent sign. and then enter values for the attribute. select how to display negative numbers. Note: The system allows multiple attributes as key for a dimension. (123). Select Thousands Separator to display a thousands separator (for example.000. 253 . In Negative Number. m Text (255 characters maximum) m True or False m Yes or No Default Value The attribute is populated with this value by default. l Data Type Select one: m Date m Date and Time m Integer m List Select a method: m o Click Add.

3 From Quick Links.00). 1. and then click Edit. 5 On the Attributes tab.Editing Dimension Attributes ä To edit dimension attributes: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. enter the number of decimal places to be displayed.000. o Select Display as Percentage to display a percent sign. select formatting options (Defaults are set in the Preferences section of the System Settings). click Supplemental Data. then click Actions. m Integer m Number If you select Number. m Text (255 characters maximum) m True or False m Yes or No Default Value . select Dimensions. In Negative Number. The system displays the thousands separator symbol for the user locale. and then Edit. select how to display negative numbers. Select an option: m Date m DateTime m List Click Add and enter values for the attribute. for example. (123). select an attribute. Edit the following: l Name l Description l Data Type Note: You can't change the data type if a member already exists for the dimension or if the attribute is referenced in a data set. o In Decimal Places. . 4 Select a Local dimension. o o l 254 Select Thousands Separator to display a thousands separator (for example.

You can add. 4 Select a Local dimension. A data set consists of attributes of information for any data record. Data sets can contain attributes from Dimension. and you can enter attributes. Deleting Dimension Attributes ä To delete dimension attributes: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. Working with Data Sets Data sets contain definitions of data tables. 255 . select Dimensions. 6 Click OK. 6 From the confirmation prompt. select Key Attribute. and Last Update. Data Type. which you can override. Note: You can't delete an attribute if it is referenced in a data set. Description.The attribute is populated with this value by default. click Yes. and Last Updated By An Attributes section with columns: Name. Description. click Supplemental Data. and Assign Workflow Associated Form Templates with columns: Name. edit. and then click Delete. then click Actions. to select the new attribute as a “Key Attribute” for the dimension. . and remove form templates from the selected data set Creating Data Sets A new data set always contains the entity attribute and is always displayed to show that you can assign this entity to a workflow. Note: The Entity key identifier and Assign Workflow options are selected by default. Manage Data window sections: l l l A master section displays a listing of Data Sets with columns: Name. Only Administrators or Power Users can create and update the data set definition. Scenario. Last Updated on. select an attribute. 7 In Update Dimension. Note: The system allows multiple attributes as key for a dimension. 3 From Quick Links. and then Edit 5 On the Attribute tab.

ä To create data sets: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. As you add attributes. you can modify the Key Identifier and attributes of the data set. 3 Select the Attributes tab. 4 Select Actions. click Supplemental Data. Text. Number. l Name l Dimension Name l Data Type—Date. Rows without data are not counted in the denominator . Assign workflow ON means that you want to select members from this dimension to assign workflow to each preparer. Date and Time. l Name—Enter a unique name. l Description Add or view information on the following Data Set tabs: l “Adding Data Set Attributes” on page 256 l “Viewing Data Set History” on page 262 Adding Data Set Attributes ä To add data set attributes: 1 From Quick Links. enter the data set information: 6 . l Assign Workflow Only attributes with Key Identifier ON can be assigned workflow. 5 On the Properties tab. To assign workflow. select Data Sets. and then New. Yes or No l Total—Enables you to specify the totaling method for the attribute: m m 256 Sum: Additive total Average: The average of the rows with data. Integer. which has the following columns: l Key Identifier If no data exists for this data set. the attribute must be a dimension. because you assign a workflow from a predefined list. 2 Select a data set. and then click Edit. Note: The Key Identifier and Assign Workflow check box option for Entity is selected by default. List. True or False. 3 From Quick Links. select Data Sets. you can select one or more as the Key Identifier.

m Calculated: If type is Calculated. o For Decimal Places. m Number If you select Number. enter the Properties tab information: l Name l Description l Specify the Attribute Type: m Input: Input is the default. c. Click OK and then Save or Save and Close. Select attributes from the Available Attributes list and Move them to the Selected Attribute list. on Create New Attribute. 257 . l Data Type Select one: m Date m Date and Time m Integer m List Click Add and enter values for the attribute. Changing the attribute type overrides previously specified Validations or Calculations. enter the number of decimal places to display. Changes made apply only to new form instances. Note: The system includes the key attribute of the dimension as a Selected Attribute. You cannot change this setting after the Attribute is created. and the Validations tab is enabled. the modified validation rule does not apply. You cannot clear the key attribute. b. select formatting options to override the defaults set in the Preferences section of System Settings. then the Calculated tab is enabled.4 m Count: The count of the rows with data m None: No total is calculated Click Actions. l Add Attribute from Dimension: a. then New. List is local to the Data Set and can't be shared among other Data Sets. Select a Dimension. 5 If you selected Add Attribute. and then select: l Add Attribute:. Note: For periods that have been opened and form instances created.

Equals. Greater than.000. Not between Value1 and Value2 d. Select Thousands Separator to display a thousands separator (for example. select from 1000 to 1000000000000 m Text (255 characters maximum) m True or False m Yes or No Required If the attribute is required. (INR) o In Negative Number. the system applies the value entered by the designer for any record created by the user. o To scale a number. Click Add. you must enter a value in this field during data entry. in Scale.00). then select the Validations tab. 7 Do one of these tasks: l If you selected Input for the Attribute Type.o o l Select Display as Percentage to display a percent sign. for example. To add a conditional expression: You can create a special validation rule for the value entered by the user. Less than. (123). o In Currency. If you need a second condition. b. select from the following lists: m m m Conjunction. To add a calculation expression: . l Use Value If Use Value is populated. 6 Click OK to save the attribute. Click OK. Note: You can change the default value during data entry. select how to display negative numbers. for example. Select an Operand and enter Value1 and Value2. Note: You must save the attribute before including it in a calculation. Is not blank. l 8 258 If you selected Calculated for the Attribute Type. then select the Calculations tab. The system displays the thousands separator symbol for the user locale. Is blank. Does not Equal. 1. c. for example. select the currency. for example. Between. a. And. Or Operand.

SUBSTRING(<Value>. The default is 2. 10) 259 . '2'. Integer Formula Calculate an attribute using common mathematical expressions. Scripted is available for attributes of type Integer. 'HOURS') l Extract Text: Returns the substring within the value. <Location>. Text Concatenate Paste together text attributes. <To Currency*>. AVERAGE_PRIOR(<Value>. <Rate Period*> Example: AVERAGE_PRIOR( {Balance (Reporting)}. return attribute value B. or Text. <Length>) Example: SUBSTRING( {Name} . <Rate Type*>. Example: First_Name+““+Last_Name+“:”+Birth_Date Integer. Number. Number. or seconds between two dates. from the positions specified. Return an attribute value based on the assignment to a List member. which denote the current date (with no time component) and date-time. 'EUR'. Numeric. DATE_DIFF(<Date1>. Note: You must have saved the List attribute values. 5. and then select the Attribute value. respectively. Table 43 Select a data type and the calculation type: Data Type selected on Properties Tab Calculation Type Description For all data types Assign Value to List. For DATE 1 and DATE 2. the values TODAY and NOW can be used. 'NOW'. List Assign List To Value Based on the value of an attribute. Multi-line Text. return attribute value A if specified conditions have been met. <Number of Periods>. Click OK. Text Scripted A free-form scripted calculation. b. return the related member from the list. This includes literal strings and automatically converting non-text attributes to strings. 'DAYS') or DATE_DIFF({Preparer End Date}. <Date2>. If the conditions have not been met. Example: (A+B)/C Numeric.a. <Type>) Example: DATE_DIFF('TODAY'. hours minutes. 9 Scripted functions with examples: l Average Prior: Averages a numeric amount over the prior X periods. For all data types Conditional For a given attribute. 'REC') l Date Difference: Returns the difference in days. Integer Round Round attribute to the specified number of digits. {Preparer End Date}.

'USD'. 'CAD'. <Rate Type*>. <Decimal Places>) 260 . <Rate Type*>. 'CAD'. 'rec'. 'Best'. <To Currency*>. 'Accounting') ) l Maximum Prior: Returns the maximum value over the prior X periods. <Rate Period*>) Example: PRIOR( {Source System Balance (Entered)}. ROUND(<Value>. <Rate Period*>) Example: MIN_PRIOR( {Source System Balance (Functional)}. 'REC'). 'Good'. <Number of Periods>. MAX_PRIOR (<Value>. <Value2>. <Rate Period*>) Example: MAX_PRIOR( {Balance (Functional)}. There can be any number of parameters. <Value2>) Example: IF_THEN_ELSE( {Risk Rating} = 'Low'. 'REC'). TRANSLATE( {Source System Balance (Functional)}. <Number of Periods Prior*>.<ValueN>) Example: MIN( TRANSLATE( { Balance (Entered)}. <Value1>. <Rate Type*>. MIN_PRIOR (<Value>.l If Then Else: Allows the user to insert a conditional calculation into the scripted calculation. 'USD'. 'Accounting'). 'EUR'. '1'. 'prior') l Round: Returns the value rounded to the decimal places specified. TRANSLATE( {Source System Balance (Reporting)}. '6'. 'EUR'.<ValueN>) Example: MAX( TRANSLATE( {Source System Balance (Entered)}. TRANSLATE( {Balance (Reporting)}. LOWERCASE(<Value>) Example: LOWERCASE( {Description} ) l Maximum: Returns the maximum value from a list of attributes. IF_THEN_ELSE({Risk Rating} = 'High'. PRIOR(<Value>. IF_THEN_ELSE(<Condition>. 'Better'. <Number of Periods>. IF_THEN_ELSE calculations can also be nested to support “ELSE IF” type calculations. 'USD'. 'Accounting'). 'CAD'. 'REC') ) l Minimum Prior: Returns the minimum value over the prior X periods. MAX(<Value1>. <To Currency*>. 'REC') l Minimum: Returns the minimum value from a list of attributes. IF_THEN_ELSE( {Risk Rating} = 'Medium'. MIN(<Value1>. There can be any number of parameters.'Bad'))) l Lowercase: Returns the value in lower case. <Value2>. 'CAD'. 'Simplified') l Prior: Returns the value of the specified prior period. <To Currency*>. '6'. TRANSLATE( {Balance (Functional)}.

Errored. <To Currency>. <Rate Type>) Example: TRANSLATE( {Balance (Entered)}. Importing List Attributes ä To import attributes of type List: 1 Create an import file of type List in a TXT file format. TRANSLATE(<Value>. 'REC') l Text Location: Returns the location of the substring within the attribute value. and List Values Updated. <To Currency*>.Example: ROUND( ({Scripted Translate} /7). starting at 1 as the first position. 6 Click Import. select Data Sets. Save and Close. 4) l Sum Prior: Returns the sum of a value over the prior X periods. Import List Values displays the values: Total List Values. Note: Changes to data set attributes apply only to subsequent data collection periods. <Rate Type*>. 3 Create or select an attribute of type List. UPPERCASE(<Value>) Example: UPPERCASE( {Name} ) 10 Click Save. List Values Created. or Close. For example: Blue Yellow Red Green The import option is always “Replace All”. 4 Click Import. Completed. INSTRING(<Value>. <Rate Period*>) Example: SUM_PRIOR( {Balance (Reporting)}. <Number of Periods>. 'Acct') l Uppercase: Returns the value in upper case. SUM_PRIOR(<Value>. 2 From Quick Links. <Value To Search>) Example: INSTRING( UPPERCASE( {Name} ). 5 Browse to a TXT import file. 261 . '3'. and then click Edit. 'TAX' ) l Translate: Translates a currency attribute to a numeric attribute using a specified rate type. 'EUR'. 'EUR'. with each value on a separate line.

and then Edit. but the attribute is referenced in a form template. 2 Select a data set and then click Edit. you cannot delete the attribute without first removing the attribute from the form template. you cannot delete the attribute. then click Actions. 2 Select a data set. click Export to Excel . If Completed with Errors. Editing Data Sets ä To edit data sets: 1 From Quick Links. 3 View the following fields: l Field l Modification Type l Supporting Object l Modified By l Modified On l Old Value l New Value Deleting Data Set Attributes ä To delete data set attributes: 1 From Quick Links. 262 . then an attribute. then Actions. select Data Sets. click OK. and then click Edit. To export the error list. 3 Select the Attributes tab. click Yes. select Data Sets. 2 Select a data set.If Completed Successfully. and then Delete: l l 4 If data exists. the errors are listed. select Data Sets. Viewing Data Set History ä To view Data Set history: 1 From Quick Links. If no data exists. From the confirmation prompt.

5 On the Properties tab. Select the form template for a particular scenario. Name Enter a unique form template name. 3 From Quick Links.Note: You cannot edit attributes referenced from Dimensions. however. From the confirmation prompt. Assign Workflow is read-only. you can modify the Key Identifier and attributes of the data set. l Description l Scenario The Scenario dimension is created as part of the application. 4 Click New. click Supplemental Data. If no data exists. and you cannot delete the data set. 2 Select a data set. select Data Sets. you cannot delete the data set. 4 Attributes tab: If data exists for this data set. select Form Templates. l l 3 If data exists. Creating Supplemental Data Manager Form Templates Administrators and Power Users can manage Form Templates. form instances are created. provide information: l . for example: Actual or Budget. 3 Properties tab: Modify the Name and Description. 6 Access these tabs on the Create Form template: 263 . then Actions. click Yes. and then Delete. Deleting Data Sets ä To delete data sets: 1 From Quick Links. ä To create form templates: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.

2 Select a reference type: l l Local File—Browse the local file system and select a file. URL—Enter an external URL reference and give it a descriptive Name. You must specify a Name. Click OK to upload the file to the system and store it with the form template. Sections can have overlapping data sets or attributes . select the Sections tab. select the reference. attached files. ä To specify form template instructions: 1 In New Form Template or Edit Form Template. and then click Delete.l Sections l Instructions l Workflow l Questions l Access l History Specifying Form Template Instructions Administrators provide instructions on how to use the form. Instructions can include text. enter instruction text. Tip: To delete a reference. ä To create or edit sections: 1 264 In New Form Template or Edit Form Template. and links to files in document repositories. ä To add a reference to a file: 1 In the References section. Working with Supplemental Data Manager Form Sections Subtopics l l l Form Template Sections: Columns Tab Form Template Sections: Group By Tab Form Template Sections: History Tab Each section of a data entry form can collect data from different data sets or attribute combinations. Click OK to store the URL in the application. 2 In Instructions. . only one attribute per data set can be writable. select the Instructions tab. click Add.

2 Click New or select a section and click Edit. click OK. Enter information or view the following Section tabs: l Columns: “Form Template Sections: Columns Tab” on page 265 l Group by: “Form Template Sections: Group By Tab” on page 266 l History: “Form Template Sections: History Tab” on page 267 To save your updates and go back to the Form Template Sections tab. This is read-only. Columns—The attributes of the form are displayed in the row and columns where the user enters the value for each attribute of the form. The system displays the attribute description as the row header of the form. click the Columns tab. l Name The name of the Data Set attribute l Dimension The column from an attribute of a specific dimension. select the columns for the form. and select or view the following columns: l Include Select other attributes to be included in the form. select the Section tab. 3 In the Edit Form Template Section. The system always displays the attribute name as the header. you make entries in the row. The Edit Form Template Section is displayed. 265 . or select a section and click Edit. It is always read-only. l Total Total method for the attribute as specified in the Data Set. 2 Click New. The system displays all columns of the Data Set that are not workflow columns. Form Template Sections: Columns Tab On the Columns tab. enter: l Name l Data Set l Data Records Select one: m m 4 5 Rows—The attributes of the form are displayed as a table. ä To update the Columns tab: 1 In New Form Template or Edit Form Template. 3 On the Properties tab. The fields include one data entry record per attribute. l Data Type The corresponding data type for the column (read-only).

click the Group By tab.l View Only The column is for view only. 4 Total Row: How the total row should be displayed: 5 6 l Top: Total row is displayed at the top of the table l Bottom: Total row is displayed at the bottom of the table l None: Total row is not displayed Enter information on the following tabs: l Columns tab: “Form Template Sections: Columns Tab” on page 265 l Group by tab: “Form Template Sections: Group By Tab” on page 266 l History tab: “Form Template Sections: History Tab” on page 267 To save your updates and go back to the Form Template Sections tab. Form Template Sections: Group By Tab ä To update the Group By tab: 1 In New Form Template or Edit Form Template. l Data Type The corresponding data type for the column (read-only). If multiple forms are created for the same Data Set. 4 Click the Columns. l Group By Data in the main table should be grouped by the selected columns. including key columns. l Name The name of the Data Set l Dimension The column from an attribute of a specific dimension (read-only). select the Section tab. and then select or view the following columns: l Include Select other columns to be included in the Group By. then only one form can contain the column for input. click OK. 3 In the Edit Form Template Section. or select a section and click Edit. 5 Total Row: Indicates how the total row should be displayed: 266 . l Total Total method for the attribute as specified in the Data Set (read-only). 2 Click New.

2 Click New. select the Section tab. 5 You can view the following information: 6 7 l Field l Modification Type l Supporting Object l Modified By l Modified On l Old Value l New Value Enter information on the following tabs: l Columns tab: “Form Template Sections: Columns Tab” on page 265 l Group by tab: “Form Template Sections: Group By Tab” on page 266 To save your updates and go back to the Form Template Sections tab. click the Workflow tab. or select More Columns to manage the visible columns and the order in which they display. click OK. or select a section and click Edit. 267 .6 7 l Top: Total row is displayed at the top of the table l Bottom: Total row is displayed at the bottom of the table l None: Total row is not displayed Enter information on the following tabs: l Columns tab:“Form Template Sections: Columns Tab” on page 265 l History tab: “Form Template Sections: History Tab” on page 267 To save your updates and go back to the Form Template Sections tab. Form Template Sections: History Tab The History tab logs changes to the form template sections. 4 Click View to select the columns to display from the list. click the History tab. Assigning the Workflow Use the Workflow tab to assign the workflow for the form. ä To view the History tab: 1 In New Form Template or Edit Form Template. click OK. 3 In the Edit Form Template Section. ä To assign the workflow for the form: 1 In New Form or Edit Form.

Approver User. 4 In the Users section. l Schedule from—The collection date: l 3 m End Date––The end date of the period. m Close Date––The closing date specified for the period. Integrator User Entity2. For example: Entity1. Start day Offset––The start date for the data collection of this form. The process starts over upon resubmission. click Import or Export. enter the following: l Frequency—How often the data is collected for this form. To delete a user. and then Delete. and posting depending on the workflow option. Approver User. regardless of during which level of approval it was rejected. the approver's due date remains the same. To import a CSV file.2 In When to Start. l Duration for—The maximum number of days allowed for a specific action per user: m Preparer—The maximum number of days allowed for data entry (submission) m Approver—The maximum number of days allowed for each level of approval m Integrator—The number of days allowed for posting This data determines the scheduled completion date for submission. Approver 1(up to the maximum assigned). Preparer User. Integrator. It must be a positive number and determines the number of days after the End date or Close Date that the collection date is authorized to begin. Only the preparer can make changes to the data and resubmit. In Workflow. select a user. Integrator User l l 268 To add a user. Enter each field: select the Entity and each of the users that are assigned to the form template. then New. Preparer User. for example: Preparer. If the preparer is late for submission. add or delete users in the enabled fields: l To import or export users from a CSV file. then click Actions. then Approve. enter the following: l Workflow option––Select an option: m Prepare m Prepare and then Approve m Prepare. and then Post m Prepare and then Post m Post l Level of Approval—Select up to 10 levels of approvers. approval. When the approver rejects the submission. . create a file with each entry on a separate line per Entity. the form always returns to the preparer. click Actions.

269 .Specifying Form Template Questions Questions are automatically grouped with roles. Required—Determines whether the question is mandatory or optional. 2 Click New or Edit. ä To create questions: 1 In New Form or Edit Form. or Integrator. o l l From Negative Number. be visible to all other roles. select the currency. For example. click the Questions tab. The default value is defined in System Preferences. (INR) If no currency is selected.000. The order indicates the question’s order within the role. (123). the amount is not translated. the individual questions are ordered. Within a role. select how to display negative numbers. Approver. Select Thousands Separator to display a thousands separator (for example. for example. 1. enter the number of decimal places to display. select formatting options: o o o For Decimal Places. l Data Type Select a question type: m Date m Date and Time m List Click Add and enter values for the attribute. however. m Integer m Number If you select Number. The system displays the thousands separator symbol for the user locale. It will. m Text (255 characters maximum) m True or False m Yes or No Role—The question is for: Preparer. a question with the role of Preparer may only be answered by Preparers. From Currency.00). 3 Enter the following: l Question Enter a question that prompts the user of the form's response. for example.

After Approval—You can't view the data until after all levels of approvals are granted. click the History tab. l The bottom panel displays the entity's form data that the user has access to. 3 In Viewers Access. select a User. Analyst. 2 Click New. and then click Save. After Submission—You can view the data as soon as the preparer submits the data. Select or clear all by clicking the check box in the title area. Setting Form Template Access On the Access tab. Approver. you determine which users are authorized and what function they perform on the form: l The top panel shows the list of users with View access. ä To add access: 1 In New Form or Edit Form. even before it has been approved. 2 View the history. for example: Administrator. all the form data for a specific entity is selected. or Close. by default. Deleting Form Templates ä To delete form templates: 1 270 Click the Navigator icon . 2 Select a question and click Delete. ä To view form template history: 1 In New Form or Edit Form. select the Questions tab. or Preparer. or select a user and click Edit. .ä To delete questions: 1 In New Form or Edit Form. Select a View Option: l l l Always—You can view the data anytime even if the data entry is not complete or has not been submitted for approval. 4 In Entities. You select or clear data individually using the check box next to each. Save and Close. Integrator. Viewing Form Template History The History tab logs changes to this form template. click the Access tab.

Clicking on this will create an immediate copy with a “copy” suffix on the name. select Form Templates. 271 . 4 Select a form template. 6 Select the form templates for that data collection period. . click Supplemental Data.2 Under Administer. 4 Click Deploy . The Deploy Form Template displays Pending Period and Open Period Data Collection Periods to choose from. e. and then Delete. In Select Data Collection Period. 3 From Quick Links. 3 From Quick Links. Click OK. d. Click Search. 3 From Quick Links. . Duplicating Form Templates ä To duplicate form templates: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. In addition. select Year and Scenario. click Supplemental Data. 4 Select a form template. Click Search to refresh the periods. then Actions. Select a period. c. and then Duplicate. 5 To select another data collection period: a. click Supplemental Data. 5 Click Yes to confirm. 7 Click Deploy. select Form Templates. Deploying a Form Template to a Data Collection Period ä To deploy a form template to a data collection period: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. all attributes are read-only to prevent multiple form templates having write access to the same Data Set. select Form Templates. then Actions. b.

select Form Templates. 6 Select the form template for that data collection period. Additional Form Templates is displayed. b. Click Search .l l 8 If the form template already was deployed. Click OK. all the existing data for this period and also all forms will be deleted permanently. . Click Search to refresh the Periods. Click OK. A warning message displays: “As a result of un-deployment. Select Year and Scenario. 7 Click Un-Deploy. The Un-Deploy Form Template is displayed. Errors: Total number of forms with errors. If non-zero. e. Form Template and Period frequency do not match: Number of Form Templates that do not match the DCP frequency. a warning message says that all existing form instances and data for that form template will be removed and new form instances will be generated. If nonzero. If additional Form Templates that are not part of the original selection must be deployed based on their data set relationships. No copying is done. then click View Details to display the form template missing the frequency. Select a Period. click Supplemental Data. d. The Select Data Collection Period is displayed. a confirmation dialog box indicates the following information: l l l l Form Templates Selected: Total number of checked Form Templates from the Deploy dialog box.” 8 272 Select the form templates. 5 To select another data collection period: a. . Un-Deploying a Form Template to a Data Collection Period ä To un-deploy a form template to a data collection period: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. After deployment is completed. 4 Click Un-Deploy . and then click Un-Deploy. plus those added from data set relationships. Total Forms to deploy: Total number of forms specified on each of the form templates. c. then click View Details to display the forms and the reason for the errors. 3 From Quick Links.

3. 10. Defined in System Settings. Applicable Form instances are in Open status. Select a Data Collection period by Year. Lock Period starts. 273 . The system activates Form Instances based on Start Day offset. Data collection that is in progress continues. Deploy the Form Template.Managing Data Collection Workflow The data collection workflow follows this order: 1. Open the period to start the data collection process. Scenario. and Post workflow process continues. 2. 8. 4. no changes can be made. 5. No new data entry is allowed. 6. no new form instances are generated. 7. Approve. 11. Period. Email notifications are sent to preparers. 9. The Prepare. Close Period starts. Start data entry. Data Collection is done for the period.

274 .

............... 280 Modifying the Navigation Flow .................................................................................................................................... You can set these options: l The thousands separator (none..... comma.16 Managing Settings In This Chapter Specifying Application Settings......... 280 Specifying Artifact Strings ...... Your selections apply to all currencies....... and Setting Member and Alias Display Options Specifying Refresh Database Options You use the Application Settings page to set preferences for your Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud application........................ dot............ 284 Specifying Application Settings Subtopics l l l l l l Specifying Number Formatting Preferences Setting Approvals Options and Out-of-Office Settings Setting Up Email for Approvals and Notifications Specifying the Date Time Display Specifying a Default Alias Table........... Specifying Number Formatting Preferences You can change the number formatting in Application Settings................................................................................................................................. or space) 275 ............................................... 283 Limiting Use of an Application During Maintenance. 282 Setting Application Defaults ............. 275 Viewing User Variables ... These choices override the settings for individual currencies set by the Service Administrator............................................................................ 279 Making Announcements........................................................................ 283 Specifying System Settings .......................... 281 Selecting Notification Preferences................................................. 279 Customizing Your Application Appearance ....................................... in all forms that you have access to in the current application.......................................................

If you select a setting other than Use Application Defaults for the thousands separator or the decimal separator.00 You can enter values with or without a decimal separator. select format options: Option Example Thousands Separator None: 1000 . you must change both separators. Note: Formatting selections take effect when you click outside the cell. under Number Formatting. click Settings. Negative Sign Prefixed Minus: -1000 Suffixed Minus: 1000Parentheses: (1000) Negative Color Black: Negative numbers are black Red: Negative numbers are red 4 Click Save. Decimal Separator Dot: 1000. 2 On the left. You can also choose to display member name aliases. Comma: 1.00 Comma: 1000. click Application Settings 3 From the Application Settings page.000 Space: 1 000 You can enter values with or without a thousands separator. you can specify a reviewer to replace a reviewer who is out of the office. You cannot select the same option for the thousands and decimal separators. or the number surrounded by parentheses) The displayed color for negative numbers (black or red) ä To change the formatting of displayed numbers: 1 On the Home page.000 Dot: 1. and approval units that are not started. Setting Approvals Options and Out-of-Office Settings For Approvals tasks.l l l The decimal separator (dot or comma) The display of negative numbers (a minus sign before or after the number. 276 .

Approvals .select to display member aliases instead of their names on Approvals pages Show Not Started Approval Units . click Application Settings 3 From the Application Settings page.select this option if you want to be notified by email when you need to perform actions on Approvals. Click Save.select to display approval process units that are not started I am currently out of the office . under Approvals. ä To set up and enable email notification: 1 On the Home page. Specifying the Date Time Display Date Format sets how dates display. click Application Settings 3 From the Application Settings page. 5 Click Save. Display Alias . Setting Up Email for Approvals and Notifications When email is set up and notification is enabled.select an alternate reviewer while the current reviewer is out of the office. and users can change the setting to determine how dates display when they work in forms and task lists. select options: l l .ä To set Approvals options: 1 On the Home page. then select an option for each review action. 277 .select this option if you want to be notified by email when a job that you launch is completed or generates an error. under Notifications. enter your email address. the system notifies users when they become the approval unit’s owner or are named as a user to notify for a review action. 4 In Email Address. click Settings. Job Console . click Settings. ä To set the date format: 1 On the Home page. 2 On the left. Service Administrators can set the date format. select options: l l l 4 . 2 On the left. click Settings.

select the option that enables the type of member data to be displayed on the Member Selector throughout your application: 5 . click Settings. grid. Specifying Refresh Database Options ä To specify Refresh Database options: 1 278 On the Home page. followed by the names Click Save. or dimension settings l Member name—Only member names l Alias—Only member aliases. and Setting Member and Alias Display Options If you create alias tables with aliases for dimensions and members. under Date Time Display. select the time zone to use for the application. you can select a default alias table for the application. Specifying a Default Alias Table. if defined l Alias:Member name—Alias. click Application Settings 3 From the Application Settings page. if defined l Member name : Alias—Names followed by aliases. select options: 4 . 2 On the left. ä To select the application’s default alias table: 1 On the Home page.2 On the left. select a format: m MM-DD-YYYY m DD-MM-YYYY m YYYY-MM-DD m Automatically Detect (to use your system’s locale settings) Click Save. You can set preferences for which set of aliases (stored in an alias table) to use for displaying member and dimension names. l From Time Zone. click Settings. l Default—The data determined by the form. l For Date Format. if defined. . select a default alias table. 4 In Member Name/Alias Display. click Application Settings 3 From Alias Table.

you must be a Service Administrator. helping users focus on certain members. 4 Click Save. click Settings. The User Variables page lists the user variables that are defined for the application. or for example. To set up user variables. click Settings. users can select a member for their own division. click Appearance 3 From the Theme drop-down. 4 Enter a Logo URL and Theme URL. if you create a user variable called Division for the Entity dimension. to change the theme. 4 To save changes for a user variable. Viewing User Variables You can set user variables to limit the number of members displayed on a form. click the check box next to Shared Members to include Shared Members in the refresh operation. and click OK. ä To view user variables: 1 On the Home page.2 On the left. . . . select a member. 2 On the left. Note: To customize your application appearance. click the Member Selector. click Application Settings 3 From Refresh Database Options. click Save. select the shape of the logo. 5 From Shape. to add your company logo to the Home page. select a theme. with their name and dimension members. click User Variables 3 To change members for a user variable. Customizing Your Application Appearance You can use Appearance to customize the appearance of pages. ä To customize the appearance of your display: 1 On the Home page. or to reset members to their original values. click Reset. 2 On the left. see “Working with User Variables” on page 140. For example. 279 .

Making Announcements Administrators can use Announcements to display a Home page message to all Oracle Financial Consolidation and Close Cloud users. The Navigation Flow page displays the navigation flows that are set up for the application. Note the following guidelines: l l 5 The End Date is optional. To save the announcement. click Announcements 3 Click Create. 7 To see your updates. ä To modify the navigation flow: 1 On the Home page. you must be a Service Administrator. When you create an announcement. click Settings. click Settings. . and also add a link to a URL. For example. You may need to select an editing mode (rich text or source code) before entering text in the Content field. sign out of the application. 2 On the left. You can modify the landing page and configure the features to display by user group. . You can see the status (Active or Inactive) of existing navigation flows. Modifying the Navigation Flow A navigation flow controls what users see on the Home page. and you can delete an existing one. ä To create an announcement: 1 On the Home page. 2 On the left. Start Date. You can copy a navigation flow to create a new one. 280 . you can specify formatting and style options for the content. select a navigation flow or use Default. click Navigation Flow 3 From the list. click Save and Close.6 Click Save. and Content of your announcement. and then sign in again. enter the Subject. 4 In Create Announcement. Note: To modify the navigation flow. you can alert users about upcoming system maintenance. and also create a new one.

Enter or select the source file: l If you selected Local. ä To import artifact strings: 1 From the Artifact Strings page. b. . enter the name of the file in Source File. l Inbox—Imports the import file from the server. click Create Copy. 2 On the left. l If you selected Inbox. select the artifact. select the location of the import file: 3 4 l Local—Imports the file from a location on your computer. select a language. Click Filter . Note: To work with Artifact Strings. 2 On the Import Artifact Strings page. and then click Apply. select the name. click the Actions icon and select Import. From the Actions menu. Specifying Artifact Strings The Artifact Strings page defines artifact strings per locale. click Delete. Click Import. you must be a Service Administrator. enter a name for the new navigation flow and then click OK. then from the drop-down arrow. ä To specify artifact strings: 1 On the Home page. You can import and export artifact strings from other files. 5 Click Save. 281 . select filters for Artifact and Property. Tip: To delete a navigation flow. and from the Add Language drop-down. click Artifact Strings 3 Optional: To filter the list of artifact strings: a. 4 To add a language for an artifact. In Create Structure. b. click Browse to navigate to the file.4 Optional: To copy a navigation flow: a. click Settings. In the Filter dialog box.

click Settings. Selecting Notification Preferences The Notifications page is used to display Close task notifications. click Notifications 3 Select an Email Start Time and End Time. . . ä To select notification preferences: 1 On the Home page. To enable notifications. and then specify where to save the file. 2 On the Export Artifact Strings page. click the Actions icon and select Export. see “Setting Up Email for Approvals and Notifications” on page 277. Due Date Reminders—A reminder is sent to users a specified number of days before the due date of the task. 4 For a Notification Type. 2 On the left.ä To export artifact strings: 1 From the Artifact Strings page. Notifications are sent in these circumstances: l l l Late Notifications—A late notification is sent to users the day after the due date of the task. Status Change Notifications—A notification that the task is ready to be worked on is sent when the task status changes. select the target location of the export file: 3 l Local—Saves the export file to a location on your local computer. Notifications are sent to users as a batch the day after the event that triggers the notification. l Outbox—Saves the export file to the server. Click Export. select an option for Notify Me: 5 282 l Once a day l Every 2 hours l Every 3 hours l Every 4 hours l Every 6 hours Click Save.

on the Member Selector dialog box m Show approval units as aliases m Show approval units that are not started m The attribute dimension date format Select Display Options to specify defaults for: m Number formatting m Remember selected page members m Allow search when pages exceed a certain number m Member indentation m The number of grid rows and columns fetched to populate forms m Date formats Click Save. . 3 Select Advanced Settings. ä To set application defaults: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. and job console m The alias table used m l 5 . such as both name and alias. To reset default settings to their original values. The type of member and alias data to display. they can restore application defaults by selecting Use Application Default where available. 4 Perform one action: l Select Application Settings to specify defaults for: m Email notifications for approvals. 283 . 3 Select Current Application Defaults. click Reset. click Application Settings. Specifying System Settings Only Administrators can specify system-wide settings. click Application Settings.Setting Application Defaults Administrators can specify defaults for the current application. Although users can override these application defaults by setting preferences. ä To specify system settings: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer.

To reset system settings to their default values. click Save. See “Limiting Use of an Application During Maintenance” on page 284. If users are logged on to the application and administrators withdraw their access. 3 Select Advanced Settings.4 Select System Settings. Only user IDs will be shown. select an option for Enable Use of the Application for: 284 . select one user or one group to notify. click Reset. Enable the Display of Substitution Variables Set how substitution variables display in the Member Selection dialog box when users respond to runtime prompts in business rules: l Display All: Display all substitution variables l Display None: Do not display substitution variables l Enable Filtering: Display only substitution variables that are valid for the runtime prompt bug Select User Assign ownership of the application to another administrator. 6 To save the system settings. . Notify These Users If Business Rules Notification is enabled. Enable Use of the Application for Determine whether users can access the application in maintenance mode. Display Users’ Full Names Yes: Show full user names. 4 Select System Settings. such as during backups. 5 Set options: Table 44 System Settings Option Description Email Character Set The character set for email messages: l UTF-8 l Regional Setting Business Rules Notification Set to Yes to notify users or groups when rules are completed or encounter errors. users are forced off the system. Limiting Use of an Application During Maintenance Administrators can withdraw and grant access to an application during maintenance. 5 For Application Maintenance Mode. click Application Settings. click the Navigator icon 2 Under Administer. No: Do not display full names. ä To limit use of an application: 1 On the Home page.

6 If your selection is more restrictive than the current setting. 7 Click Save. Administrators: Only administrators can log on. click OK. Other users are forced off and prevented from logging on until the option is reset to All Users. 285 .l l All users: All users who have access to the application can log on or continue working with the application.

286 .

....................................................................................... For the purpose of review...... 294 Locking and Unlocking Entities ................ After an approval unit is Approved........... 293 Deleting and Renaming Approval Unit Hierarchies ................................ no more changes can be made to it. 287 .... The administrator starts the approval process.................. 294 Approval Process Overview Administrators can set up an approval process to transfer ownership of data............... 289 Editing Approval Unit Hierarchies........ 293 Viewing Approval Unit Hierarchy Usage ... and Entity... When the approval process is started...... The last reviewer in the approval hierarchy approves the approval unit. It changes to Approved status.................................................17 Managing the Approval Process In This Chapter Approval Process Overview............................. Year and Period combination................................................. provide review control..... The administrator can optionally lock entities before closing the period.............. data is organized into approval units.. Owners and Reviewers promote approval units.... An approval unit is the combination of data for a specific Scenario.................... The administrator assigns the approval unit hierarchy to a Scenario..... Year..................................................... 287 Managing Periods for the Approval Process ............. the approval unit is locked for other users and only the current owner can modify the data in it... Period........ For example: l Actual/FY15/Jan/Massachusetts l Budget/FY16/Feb/New York The approval process generally follows these steps: l l l l l l The administrator sets up the approval unit hierarchy and opens a period for the approval process................ 288 Starting the Approval Process ............................ 288 Creating Approval Unit Hierarchies ................................... and ensure data privacy.................

or to close them. . you must open the period for the process. click Close. 4 Click Go. . 5 Select Tree View and click Start to begin the approval process. . To manage periods. and Period. ä To start the approval process: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Workflow. click Manage Approvals. all associated annotations and history are discarded. and period. 3 From Scenario. After the process is started. from the Actions drop-down. all periods have an initial status of Unopened. you close the period. Data values are retained. select Open. select Manage Periods 2 Select the periods to open or close. you must be the Service Administrator. Starting the Approval Process Only an Administrator can start the approval process. year. ä To open or close periods: 1 From the Console. select a valid scenario. Year. 3 To open the selected periods. a message displays that you have not assigned an approval unit hierarchy. If no approval units are started. 6 Optional: Select Exclude to remove an approval unit from the process. When the approval process is complete. Caution! 288 After you exclude an approval unit.Managing Periods for the Approval Process Before you start the approval process. By default. the approval unit moves from one reviewer to another until the process is complete.

6 Assign owners and reviewers for each stage of the approval process and create the approval unit promotional path. children of the Eastern Region (New York. See “Selecting Approval Unit Hierarchy Members” on page 290. The administrator starts the approval process. the selected entities do no participate in the approval process.Creating Approval Unit Hierarchies Subtopics l l l l Setting Up the Approval Unit Hierarchy Selecting Approval Unit Hierarchy Members Assigning Approval Unit Owners and Reviewers Assigning Approval Unit Hierarchies to Scenarios An approval unit hierarchy contains approval units and entities that are part of the review process. Massachusetts) would promote approval units to the Eastern Region. For example. then reviewers promote approval units starting at the leaf-member level. 289 . 5 Select the primary and subhierarchy members to include in the approval process. See “Locking and Unlocking Entities” on page 294. The last reviewer in the approval hierarchy. the inclusion rules that you create determine whether a new member is part of the approval process. in this case the U.. See “Setting Up the Approval Unit Hierarchy” on page 289. 7 Click Save.S.S. and template. As members are added to the Entity dimension. the entities that you select participate in the approval process. performs the final Approve action. then the reviewer at the Eastern Region would promote the approval units to U. See “Assigning Approval Unit Owners and Reviewers” on page 291. Pennsylvania. ä To create an approval unit hierarchy: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Workflow. you can select an approval template: l l Bottom Up approval process template—In the Bottom Up approval process. approval options. Consolidation template—When you use the Consolidation template. . but can be locked or unlocked from the Approvals page. 4 Set up the hierarchy with an approval name. Setting Up the Approval Unit Hierarchy When you set up an approval unit hierarchy. 3 Click Create. click Approval Unit. The Entity is the primary dimension for each approval unit hierarchy.

select Bottom Up. Shared members are not displayed in the approval unit hierarchy. Click Save and then Finish to save changes and close the approval unit hierarchy. Select Workflow. Notes: l l 2 290 At any time during approval unit hierarchy member selection. specify the approval unit hierarchy name. l Right-click and select Collapse to expand the display. 4 Select Approvals Dimension. select a hierarchy and click Edit. 9 For Cube. Selecting Approval Unit Hierarchy Members ä To select approval unit hierarchy members: 1 Take an action: l l From Approvals Dimension. 8 In Approvals Template. 3 Take an action: . 7 In Enable Approvals. select: l l All to add all entities to the approval process Custom to define the parent and relative generation. l To edit an existing hierarchy. 5 In Hierarchy Name. click Approval Unit. 10 Take an action: l l Click Next or select Primary and Subhierarchy Selection to select the approval unit members (see “Selecting Approval Unit Hierarchy Members” on page 290. and then Approval Unit to edit an approval unit hierarchy. .ä To set up an approval unit hierarchy: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Workflow. l To create a new hierarchy. you can click Reset to Default Hierarchy to reset it to its default membership defined in the Approvals Dimension page. click Next or select Primary and Subhierarchy Selection to continue defining an approval unit hierarchy. 6 Optional: Specify a description. the required entities are added to the hierarchy. Define how to display the approval unit hierarchy: l Right-click and select Expand to expand the display. click Create. select the cube from which the approval unit values are derived. Based upon the selection.

l Click Save and then Finish to save changes and close the approval unit hierarchy. Take an action: l Click Next or select Assign Owners to specify approval unit ownership. a group. Next.l Select All Entities to display all potential approval units. If you select individual users as Reviewers. or Both. l Include Member to include only the approval unit. For Reviewers. 291 . you can assign individual users or a group. Specify the generations to include when prompted. Within a group. but none of its descendants. then click Search Up or Down in the hierarchy. or End (last page). 3 Optional: For approval units not included in the default settings for the approval process. l Select Approval Units to display only enabled approval units. l l For Search. Approval unit reviewers are also inherited. For approval unit Owners. l 5 Include Generation to include one or more approval unit generations. l Exclude Member to exclude only the approval unit. Exclude Generation to exclude approval unit generations. enter a page number in Page and click Go. Only one user or one group can be assigned as an Owner of an approval unit. and the approvals must follow the order in which the users are entered. check the box to the left of the approval unit name to include it in the approval process. select Name. l l Exclude Children to exclude the children of the approval unit. but none of its descendants. You can specify different approval unit owners and reviewers other than those inherited by the approval units. but only one user can be the Owner at a time. To move from page to page in a multipage approval unit hierarchy. Specify the generations to exclude when prompted. l Include All Descendants to include all descendants of the approval unit. l Exclude All Descendants to exclude all descendants of the approval unit. Assigning Approval Unit Owners and Reviewers Approval unit ownership is inherited from the approval unit parents. all users must perform the Approve action. any user within the group can be the Reviewer and can promote to the next level. 4 Optional: Right-click an approval unit name to define subhierarchy members for the approval process. Alias. or multiple groups. any user can become the Owner. and then select one Include/Exclude option: l Include Children to include the children of the approval unit. or click Start (first page). If you select a group (or groups) as a Reviewer. Prev (previous page). Enter any part or all of a name in Search to locate an entity. you can assign individual users.

click Search to select an owner. Assigning Approval Unit Hierarchies to Scenarios During the approval process. Note: If the reviewers are individual users. 5 Under Notify These Users. then under Owner. Select the Users tab to assign an individual user as the owner. such as Q1 or FY16. Select Workflow. 3 Under Reviewer. Click 292 . click Next or select Assign Owners to continue defining an approval unit hierarchy. ä To assign approval unit hierarchy Scenario. click correct. The first reviewer in the list is the first user to work on the approval unit. Year. calculations are run for various scenarios. click Approval Unit Assignment. . and then Approval Unit to edit an approval unit hierarchy. An approval unit can have only one owner. Select the Users tab to assign individual users as reviewers. Select the Groups tab to assign a group as the owner. Year and Period assignment: a. Select the Groups tab to assign a single group or multiple groups as reviewers. 6 Optional: Repeat these steps for other approval units to assign owners and reviewers. you assign approval unit hierarchies to the Scenario. in the Actions column for the approval unit. Select an approval unit. verify that it is Under Promotional Path. or multiple groups.ä To assign approval unit owners and reviewers: 1 Take an action: l l 2 From Primary and Subhierarchy Selection. and Period combinations included in the approval process. Reviewers can be individual users. Year. or click Finish to save your work and close the approval unit hierarchy. and Period combinations: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Workflow. and then correct any errors. a single group. click Search and select approval unit reviewers. Before beginning the approval process. When the first reviewer promotes the approval unit. Either a user or a group can be the owner. 3 Add a Scenario. and so on through the list of reviewers that you create. 7 Click Save to save your work and continue. select the reviewers in the order that you want them to review the approval unit. the second reviewer selected becomes the approval unit owner. 4 to display the approval unit promotional path. click Search to select the users to notify for each move of the approval unit from one user to another.

click Delete 4 . Year and Period assignments or data validation rules which are defined in forms. l Assign Owners See “Assigning Approval Unit Owners and Reviewers” on page 291. Viewing Approval Unit Hierarchy Usage Approval unit hierarchies might have dependencies such as Scenario. Editing Approval Unit Hierarchies ä To edit an approval hierarchy: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Workflow. 3 Select an approval unit hierarchy. 293 . and click Edit. Tip: To remove an assignment. l Usage See “Viewing Approval Unit Hierarchy Usage” on page 293. From the Scenario column drop-down. Click OK. e. Approvals Dimension See “Setting Up the Approval Unit Hierarchy” on page 289. select the year to associate with the approval unit hierarchy. From the Year column drop-down. 5 Click Save when done. Click Save to save the assignments and continue. d. select the scenario to associate with the approval unit hierarchy. l Primary and Subhierarchy Selection See “Selecting Approval Unit Hierarchy Members” on page 290. The Usage tab enables you to view approval unit hierarchies so that you can see and remove the dependencies if needed. click Approval Unit.b. 4 Select the appropriate tab for the changes that you want to make: l . If dependencies exist for an approval unit hierarchy. the hierarchy cannot be deleted until the dependencies are removed. select the period to associate with the approval unit hierarchy. c. From the Period column drop-down. A new assignment row is displayed.

select the approval unit hierarchy to delete. The Usage tab displays objects that reference the hierarchy so that you can disassociate them from the hierarchy if needed. 3 Select an approval unit hierarchy. If a Scenario. ä To delete or rename approval unit hierarchies: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Workflow. they are listed by scenario. Click the link to display the form in edit mode in a new tab. 6 If you are deleting an approval unit hierarchy. click Rename. and then select Usage to view approval unit hierarchy dependencies. You can also view the lock status and calculation status on the Data Status form. Deleting and Renaming Approval Unit Hierarchies You can delete an approval unit hierarchy if it is not referenced by data validation rules or scenario assignments. Renaming an approval unit hierarchy does not affect the objects that reference it. 294 . year and period. If data validation rules are associated. Locking and Unlocking Entities After you receive approval for an approval unit. You can then update or delete the rule to disassociate it from the hierarchy. Locking prevents any changes to the entity for a selected scenario. 4 Select Forms to view associated data validation rules in forms. To rename. repeat these steps until all dependencies are removed. you can lock the data to prevent further modification. click Approval Unit. You can also change the name of an approval unit hierarchy. or select Scenario to view associated scenario assignments. they are listed by form. select the approval unit hierarchy to rename. and then click Delete. 5 If you remove dependencies. and enter a new name. You can then remove the assignment to disassociate it from the hierarchy. Click OK.ä To view approval unit hierarchy usage: 1 Click the Navigator icon 2 Under Workflow. Year and Period combination is associated. Click the link to display the assignment in a new tab. click Edit. You can view the lock status and lock and unlock entities on the Approvals page. click Approval Unit. click Refresh on the Usage tab to refresh the list. 3 Take an action: l l 4 . l l . To delete.

but not its children. click Change Status to change the status to Locked. ä To lock entities: 1 On the Home page. unpost a journal. click Approvals. 5 On the Change Status page. the Approvals page displays a Failed status next to the approval unit. you must be the Service Administrator. 3 Click Done. from the Actions drop-down. the system unlocks the parent entity and all its children. post. or modify a data form that contains that entity. No Data. To lock entities. 6 Click Done. You can only unlock data for a period if the next period is unlocked. For example. select filters to display approval units: l Scenario l Year l Period l Approvals Status l Approval Unit l Click More to display and select from additional filter options. The prior period data must be locked. 295 . and from the Filter dialog box. If you select the Unlock action on a parent entity. select Unlock or Unlock Single. 3 Click Apply to apply the filter criteria. you cannot submit. click a locked approval unit.During the data load process. 4 Click an unlocked approval unit. the system does not load locked entities. 2 Click Filter . If you select the Unlock Single action on a parent entity. Click the link to view a detailed validation report and resolve the error. 2 On the Change Status page. You can lock data only if these conditions are met: l l The entity’s calculation status must be OK. You cannot lock an entity with Impacted calculation status. If an entity is locked. ä To unlock entities: 1 From the Approvals page. If an error occurs during the locking or unlocking process. For example. you can only unlock an entity in February if the entity is unlocked in March. you can only lock an entity in the February period if it is locked in January. the system unlocks only the parent entity. or System Change.

296 .